Datasheet | Apple 12/640PS Technical information

Add to my manuals
354 Pages

advertisement

Datasheet | Apple 12/640PS Technical information | Manualzz

1

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS

This chapter explains how to unpack and set up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

Main features of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS

m

Print quality The printer has a resolution of 600 dots per inch. Its FinePrint feature smoothes text, and its PhotoGrade feature (available with additional printer memory) improves graphic images.

m

Speed The printer prints up to 12 pages per minute.

m

Multiplatform support You can connect the printer to Mac OS-based computers, Windows-based computers, and UNIX-based computers.

m

Connectivity The printer offers LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel connections.

m

Automatic traffic control The printer can be connected to many computers and networks using the printer’s LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel ports.

The printer prints only one user’s job at a time, but it manages incoming print jobs from all ports so that no printing conflicts or problems occur.

The printer also automatically senses which printer language—PostScript ™ or PCL5—the job requires.

m

Fonts The printer supports both TrueType and PostScript fonts. The printer has 35 built-in PostScript fonts.

m

Energy savings The printer can automatically lower its power consumption when it’s not being used.

1

m

Flexible paper handling In the standard configuration, you can print up to 330 sheets (250 in the standard paper cassette plus 80 in the multipurpose tray) without changing paper. You can easily add a 500-sheet cassette and feeder or a 50-envelope cassette. The printer also supports duplex printing

(printing on both sides of the paper) when the optional duplex printing unit is attached.

Choosing a place for the printer

Choose a flat, stable area with adequate room around the printer. The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, or humidity. Keep the printer’s vents free from obstruction to allow for proper operation and cooling of the printer. Don’t use ammonia-based cleaners, which can react chemically with the toner, on or around the printer.

Allow enough space to open the door.

Allow space to open the top cover.

2 Chapter 1

Make sure you have enough space to open the paper cassette.

IMPORTANT Keep the printer’s vents unobstructed for proper operation and cooling.

See Appendix D, “Technical Information,” for more information about the physical requirements of the printer.

Important safety instructions

Before you plug in your LaserWriter 12/640 PS, read these important safety instructions.

WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded. Your printer is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug!

For your own safety and that of your equipment, always take the following precautions.

Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cord) if any of the following conditions exists: m the power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged m you spill something into the case m your printer is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture m your printer has been dropped or the case has been otherwise damaged m you suspect that your printer needs service or repair m you want to clean the case (use only the recommended procedure described in Chapter 1)

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 3

4 Chapter 1

Be sure that you always do the following: m Keep the printer’s vents free from obstruction.

m Keep your printer away from sources of liquids, such as wash basins, bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on.

m Protect your printer from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on.

m Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug your printer into a wall socket.

m Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others.

m Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system.

WARNING Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation of this product, or similar products, must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not permit them to handle any cables.

`

Unpacking the printer

IMPORTANT The printer weighs approximately 30 pounds (approximately

14 kilograms).

1 Remove the Styrofoam packing material located on either side of the printer.

2 Lift the printer out of the box and remove the printer from the plastic bag.

3 Make sure you have everything shown here:

Toner cartridge

LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer

Power cord

CD-ROM disc

(Some printers come with floppy disks instead.)

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 5

4 You also need to obtain whatever cables your networks require.

Parallel interface cable LocalTalk connecting kit

Ethernet transceivers and cables

5 Pull the packing tape from the printer’s top cover.

6 Pull open the printer’s top cover.

6 Chapter 1

Lift this latch to open the top cover.

7 Remove the plastic foam block from inside the printer.

Save all the packing materials. They provide the best protection for the printer if you ever need to move it.

Remove the packing material.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 7

Installing the first toner cartridge

The toner cartridge contains the dry plastic powder that the printer uses instead of ink. The first time you install a toner cartridge, follow the steps given here. After that, each time you install a cartridge, follow the instructions in Chapter 10.

Each cartridge lasts approximately 6,000 pages, depending on the kind of printing you do. If you use the printer to produce more graphic images than text, you may need to change cartridges more often.

WARNING Use only cartridges designed for use with your LaserWriter

12/640 PS printer. Other cartridges may not fit and may damage the printer.

1 Slide the yellow plastic square back and forth to remove any dust.

Slide the square back and forth.

2 Take the cartridge out of its packaging.

8 Chapter 1

3 Distribute the toner powder by gently rocking the cartridge back and forth.

4 Firmly pull the tab directly away from the cartridge to remove the sealing tape.

WARNING Pull the tab straight out of the cartridge. Don’t pull too quickly or at an angle—either might damage the seals on the cartridge.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 9

10 Chapter 1

5 Align the arrow on the left side of the toner cartridge with the arrow on the left side of the printer, then slide the cartridge downward into the printer. Make sure the toner cartridge is inserted all the way and properly seated inside the printer.

Make sure the toner cartridge is inserted all the way and properly seated inside the printer.

6 Close the printer.

The top cover clicks into place.

Wait to install the LaserWriter 12/640 PS options

If you purchased any of the following options, wait to install them until you’ve connected the printer to your network: m duplex printing unit m paper and envelope cassettes m face-up output tray m memory

By waiting, you can ensure the printer is working correctly (thus simplifying troubleshooting).

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 11

Loading paper into the cassette

You can load paper into the paper cassette or the multipurpose tray, or both.

For instructions on using the multipurpose tray, see Chapter 9, “Loading

Paper.”

The multipurpose tray can hold up to 80 sheets of paper—U.S. letter-size,

U.S. legal-size, A4, A5, B5, executive, Comm10 envelopes, Monarch envelopes, DL envelopes, C5 envelopes, EuroPostcards, transparencies, and sheets of labels. The exact number of sheets the multipurpose tray can hold depends on the weight of the paper. You can also use the tray for manual feed jobs.

The paper cassette can hold up to 250 sheets of paper—U.S. letter-size, U.S.

legal-size, executive, A4, or B5.

You can expect excellent printing results from photocopier paper. Use paper labeled “laser-quality” for best results.

1 Slide the paper cassette out of the printer.

12 Chapter 1

2 Prepare a stack of paper.

You can load up to 250 sheets of 20-pound photocopier paper. Make sure the edges are even on all sides before inserting the stack of paper.

3 Set the length guide to match your paper’s length. Move the width guide by pinching and sliding it into place.

4 Push down gently on the paper tray until it locks into place.

5 Slide the stack of paper into the cassette.

6 Slide the paper under the bracket at the front of the cassette.

Push the paper down if necessary, but don’t overload the cassette, or the paper may jam when you print.

Make sure the paper fits under this corner bracket.

Slide paper under the retainers.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 13

14 Chapter 1

Load three-hole punched paper face down, with the holes toward the left side of the cassette. Load letterhead paper face down, with the tops of the pages at the front of the cassette (the handle end).

Align letterhead and three-hole punched paper as shown.

7 Adjust the length and width guides so that they fit snugly against the paper.

Adjust the length and width guides to fit the size paper you’re using.

8 Slide the cassette into the printer.

Push the cassette in all the way.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 15

Connecting the printer

You can connect the printer to many computers and networks using the printer’s LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel ports. The printer prints only one user’s job at a time, but it manages incoming print jobs from all ports so that no printing conflicts or problems occur. Unless you specify otherwise, it also automatically senses which printer language—PostScript or PCL5—the job requires.

Note: If you are connecting the printer to a network with routers that combine LocalTalk and EtherTalk into one logical zone, only one printer port should be connected to the network. Apple recommends Ethernet.

Port

LocalTalk

Ethernet

Parallel

LocalTalk port

Ethernet port

Parallel port

Communication switch

Network protocols Computer

AppleTalk Mac OS

AppleTalk (EtherTalk) Mac OS

Novell NetWare

Novell ATPS

Windows

Mac OS

TCP/IP

UNIX

Windows and DOS

16 Chapter 1

Connecting to a LocalTalk network

If you have an existing LocalTalk network, here’s how to add the LaserWriter

12/640 PS to it.

1 Obtain a LocalTalk connecting kit.

Connector box

LocalTalk cable

LocalTalk connecting kits come in many varieties. Yours may look different.

2 Plug the connector box into the LocalTalk port (

ˆ

) on the printer.

3 Connect the printer to the network in one of these two ways: m To connect the printer to the end of a LocalTalk network, use the LocalTalk cable to connect the empty socket of the nearest device’s connector box to the printer’s connector box.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 17

18 Chapter 1 m To connect the printer between two devices on a LocalTalk network, disconnect one LocalTalk cable from the connector box of the device immediately to the left or right of the printer and plug it into the new printer’s connector box. Then use the new LocalTalk cable to connect the free socket on the printer’s connector box to the socket you freed on the other device’s connector box.

What to do after connecting to a LocalTalk network m If you wish to connect the printer to other networks, or to connect the printer directly to an IBM PC or compatible computer, see the appropriate sections later in this chapter.

m If you’re finished connecting the printer, skip to “Adjusting Communication

Settings,” later in this chapter.

See Chapter 2 for more information about setting up the printer on a

LocalTalk network, or Appendix B for information about setting up the printer on a NetWare network running ATPS.

Connecting directly to a single Mac OS–based computer

Use this method to connect a single Mac OS–based computer to the printer.

However, since that single computer takes up the printer’s LocalTalk port, you cannot also connect the printer to a LocalTalk network.

1 Obtain two LocalTalk Kits.

2 Plug one LocalTalk connector into the computer’s printer (

[

) port.

3 Plug one end of the cable into the LocalTalk connector on the computer.

4 Plug the second LocalTalk connector into the printer’s LocalTalk (

ˆ

) port.

Printer port

ˆ

LocalTalk port

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 19

What to do after connecting to a single Mac OS computer m If you wish to connect the printer to other networks, or to connect the printer directly to a Windows or DOS computer, see the appropriate sections later in this chapter.

m If you’re finished connecting the printer, skip to “Adjusting Communication

Settings,” later in this chapter.

See Chapter 2 for more information about setting up the printer on a

LocalTalk network, or Appendix B for information about setting up the printer on a NetWare network running ATPS.

Connecting to an Ethernet network

A single Ethernet cable can carry a number of network protocols, including

AppleTalk (called EtherTalk when it’s on an Ethernet network), Novell

NetWare, and TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). To connect the printer to an Ethernet network running any combination of these protocols, follow these steps:

1 Obtain an Ethernet transceiver and a length of Ethernet cable appropriate for your network’s media type—thin, thick, or twisted pair.

20 Chapter 1

Apple Ethernet thin coaxial transceiver

Apple Ethernet

AUI adapter

Apple Ethernet twisted-pair transceiver

2 Plug the short cable from the transceiver into the Ethernet port (

G

) on the printer.

3 Connect the printer to the Ethernet network in one of these three ways: m To connect the printer to the end of an Ethernet network, use the Ethernet cable to connect the empty socket of the nearest device’s transceiver to the printer’s transceiver, as shown here.

m To connect the printer between two devices on an Ethernet network, disconnect one Ethernet cable from the transceiver of the device immediately to the left or right of the printer and plug it into the new printer’s transceiver. Then use the new Ethernet cable to connect the free socket on the printer’s transceiver to the socket you freed on the other device’s transceiver.

m To connect the printer to an Ethernet hub, see the documentation that came with the Ethernet hub.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 21

22 Chapter 1

What to do after connecting to an Ethernet network m If you wish to connect the printer directly to a Windows or DOS computer, see the next section.

m If you’re finished connecting the printer, skip to “Adjusting Communication

Settings,” later in this chapter.

See Chapters 2, 3, and 4 for more information about setting up the printer for different network interfaces.

Connecting to a Windows or DOS computer with a parallel cable

1 Obtain a parallel interface cable like this one.

25-pin connector

36-pin

Centronics

2 Use the parallel cable to connect the computer to the printer:

Secure the clips.

Attach the cable’s smaller connector to the parallel port on the printer.

Attach the cable to the parallel port on your computer. (Your computer’s parallel port may be in a different location.)

Parallel interface cable

What to do after connecting directly to a Windows or DOS computer m Read the rest of this chapter.

See Chapter 3 for more information about setting up the printer.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 23

Connecting the power and turning on the printer

Once you’ve connected the printer to your networks, you’re ready to start up the printer. Follow these steps to make sure everything is working correctly.

1 Make sure the printer is turned off.

On position

Off position

2 Plug in the printer.

Insert the socket end of the power cord into the recessed receptacle on the back of the printer. Plug the other end into a grounded (three-hole) AC outlet.

24 Chapter 1

3 Press the “|” on the power switch to turn the printer on.

On position

4 Save the startup page. It contains information you may need to complete your network setup.

The printer takes a minute or two to warm up, and then it automatically prints a startup page. It prints the startup page every time you restart unless you turn the startup page off using either the Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS or the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows. See Appendix A for details on these utilities.

The startup page shows how the printer is set up, including the network connection types and what options are attached to the printer.

The startup page should look clean and sharp. If it is spotty, too light or too dark, or otherwise unclear, switch the printer off and on to print a second page. Try this two or three times if necessary. If the output doesn’t improve, or if the printer won’t print the startup page, refer to Part III, “Troubleshooting.”

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 25

26 Chapter 1

5 Check the status lights.

After the startup page is printed, the Ready/In Use light glows steadily. All other lights should be off. If any other lights are on, see Chapter 11.

U

Ready/In Use light

»

Paper Out light

Paper Jam light

Saving energy

When you save energy, you save our natural resources and reduce pollution.

If you’re concerned about energy consumption, you can take advantage of the printer’s built-in energy-saving feature. The printer enters an energy-saving mode 10 seconds after finishing printing.

You can also save energy on the LaserWriter 12/640 PS, as well as on all other printers (including those without energy-saving features), by taking these steps: m If you know you won’t be using the printer for a while—say, overnight— turn it off.

m Use the page preview feature provided in many programs to check page layout rather than printing a draft.

Adjusting communication settings

Though you can adjust many of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer’s communication settings, the normal settings work for most environments.

To make sure the printer is set up to use the normal settings, check the communication switch on the left side of the printer to make sure it’s in the Normal (in) position. The settings are listed in Appendix D.

Communication switch

Why customize communication settings?

Though the standard communication settings work well for most environments, you might want to customize communication settings to turn off network interfaces you don’t need. For example, if you know the printer will never receive a NetWare message over the network, you can turn off the interface and stop the printer from sending out unnecessary NetWare packets.

Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 27

How to customize communication settings

To customize communication settings, use either of the following two programs: m Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS m Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows

See Appendix A for details on using these utilities.

What to do next

Finish preparing the printer and completing the network connections by reading one or more of the following chapters: m Chapter 2 explains how to set up the printer on an

AppleTalk network .

m Chapter 3 explains how to set up the printer on a

Novell NetWare network . It also explains how to set up a direct connection to an IBM PC or compatible computer.

m Chapter 4 explains how to set up the printer on a

TCP/IP network .

28 Chapter 1

2

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users

This chapter explains how to prepare the printer for use on an AppleTalk network, and prepare Macintosh Operating System (Mac OS)–based computers to print on the printer.

Note: For instructions on setting up the printer for access by Mac OS client computers on a NetWare network, see Appendix B.

29

Before you begin

This chapter presents instructions for installing the Mac OS printer software and configuring the printer with it. Before you begin, make sure you have m set up the printer as described in Chapter 1 m connected the printer to your network m made backup copies of the printer disks (if your printer software was shipped on a CD-ROM disc, you can skip this step)

Be sure to complete these tasks before continuing with the procedures in this chapter.

System requirements

To use the printer software, your Mac OS–based computer must have system software version 7.1 or later and at least 4 megabytes (MB) of memory (8 MB recommended). If your system software is an earlier version, you need to obtain a system software upgrade from your computer or software dealer.

Installing all the printer software and fonts requires approximately 9 MB of free space on your hard disk.

Initial AppleTalk setup

The printer comes with software and fonts for use with Mac OS–based computers. Before Mac OS users can print, the printer administrator must connect the printer to the network, install the printer software and fonts, and configure the printer.

30 Chapter 2

Step 1: Installing the printer software

IMPORTANT Do not “drag install” the printer software. If you do, the files won’t be properly decompressed and won’t work.

Installing from the CD-ROM disc

1 Quit any programs you are running.

2 Turn off any automatic virus-detection programs you have on your computer.

If you don’t, problems may occur during the installation. After installation is complete, you can turn the virus-detection programs back on. (For instructions on turning off each virus-detection program, see the manual that came with the program, or telephone the manufacturer of the program.)

3 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

The disc’s icon appears on the desktop.

Note: Some systems require you to place the disc into a caddy before inserting it into the CD-ROM drive.

4 Double-click the disc icon to open the disk, if necessary.

5 Double-click the MAC_OS folder, if necessary.

6 Double-click the SOFTWARE folder, if necessary.

7 Double-click the INSTALL folder, if necessary.

8 Read the Before You Install file to check for late-breaking news.

9 Double-click the Installer icon to start the Installer program.

After a moment, a Welcome dialog box appears.

10 Click Continue.

After a moment, the Install dialog box appears. At the top of the dialog box is a pop-up menu set to allow you to perform an Easy Install.

Easy Install installs all the software you need. It installs the LaserWriter 8 software, the Desktop PrintMonitor, and the Apple Printer Utility.

Custom Install lets you specify what portions of the software you would like to install.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 31

32 Chapter 2

IMPORTANT The Installer checks to make sure you have what you need to use the printer software. If you’re missing anything, a message tells you what you need. You won’t be able to install the software until you correct the problem.

If a dialog box says you don’t have the correct system software, you can purchase a new version from an Apple-authorized dealer.

11 Click the Install button.

The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and then begins to copy files.

12 Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.

After the installation, the Installer tells you to restart your computer.

13 Click the Restart button.

The software is now installed on the hard disk. If you turned off any automatic virus-detection programs on your computer, turn them back on now.

After you restart, you may notice a new icon on your desktop, one that represents a desktop printer.

You will also see the Apple LaserWriter Software folder on your hard disk.

This folder contains the Apple Printer Utility and Read Me files.

Creating installation disks from the CD-ROM disc

You can create installation floppy disks from the CD-ROM disc. You’ll need seven blank floppy disks. To create installation disks, follow these steps:

1 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

The disc’s icon appears on the desktop.

Note: Some systems require you to place the disc into a caddy before inserting it into the CD-ROM drive.

2 Double-click the disc icon to open the disc, if necessary.

3 Double-click the MAC_OS folder, if necessary.

4 Double-click the SOFTWARE folder, if necessary.

5 Copy the DISKS folder to your hard disk.

6 Double-click the DISKS folder on your hard disk.

7 Double-click the Floppy Disk Maker application.

8 Click Full Set.

A dialog box appears that gives you some information, such as the approximate time it will take to copy the images to floppy disks.

9 Click Start to start the copy process.

10 Follow the instructions on the screen until all disk images have been copied.

Be sure to label the disks.

Installing from the floppy disks

To install the printer software on a Mac OS–based computer, follow these steps:

1 Quit any programs you are running.

2 Turn off any automatic virus-detection programs you have on your computer.

If you don’t, problems may occur during the installation. After installation is complete, you can turn the virus-detection programs back on. (For instructions on turning off each virus-detection program, see the manual that came with the program, or telephone the manufacturer of the program.)

3 Make sure the disks are locked.

4 Insert LaserWriter Disk 1 for Mac OS into a disk drive.

The disk’s icon appears on the desktop.

Note: If you are installing from floppy disks made from the CD-ROM disc, the floppy disk label may be different.

5 Double-click the disk icon to open the disk, if necessary.

6 Read the Before You Install file to check for late-breaking news.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 33

34 Chapter 2

7 Double-click the Installer icon to start the Installer program.

After a moment, a Welcome dialog box appears.

8 Click Continue.

After a moment, the Install dialog box appears. At the top of the dialog box is a pop-up menu set to allow you to perform an Easy Install.

Easy Install installs all the software you need. It installs the LaserWriter 8 software, the Desktop PrintMonitor, the Apple Printer Utility, and the Control

Strip module (if the Control Strip is installed).

Custom Install lets you specify what portions of the software you would like to install.

IMPORTANT The Installer checks to make sure you have what you need to use the printer software. If you’re missing anything, a message tells you what you need. You won’t be able to install the software until you correct the problem.

If a dialog box says you don’t have the correct system software, you can purchase a new version from an Apple-authorized dealer.

9 Click the Install button.

The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and then begins to copy files.

10 Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.

After the installation, the Installer tells you to restart your computer.

11 Click the Restart button.

The software is now installed on the hard disk. If you turned off any automatic virus-detection programs on your computer, turn them back on now.

After you restart, you may notice a new icon on your desktop, one that represents a desktop printer.

You will also see the Apple LaserWriter Software folder on your hard disk.

This folder contains the Apple Printer Utility and Read Me files.

More information about the Installer program

In the procedure just described, the Installer places all the software you need onto your hard disk. In rare circumstances, you may want to install only a subset. For example, you may not want to install the Apple Printer Utility on users’ systems because this utility changes the settings in the printer for all users. In that case, choose Custom Install from the pop-up menu in the

Installer. A list of choices appears. To install something from the list, click to select it, then click the Install button. (There is also a Custom Remove feature.)

Step 2: Choosing the printer

Before you use your printer for the first time, you must use the Chooser to select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS and set up the printer software.

Once you select the printer in the Chooser, you won’t need to repeat this step unless you change printers or change the way your printer is connected.

1 Choose the Chooser from the Apple (

K

) menu.

The Chooser window appears.

2 Click the LaserWriter 8 icon (in the left half of the Chooser).

If you don’t see the LaserWriter 8 icon, scroll through the window.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 35

3 Click the name of the network zone in which your printer is located, if your printer is connected to a network with zones.

The name of your LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer appears in the right half of the Chooser (along with the names of any other available LaserWriter printers). (Your Chooser may not look exactly like the illustration.)

36 Chapter 2

4 Click the name of your LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

You’ve now selected the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer for printing.

If this is the first time you’re using the printer, you must set up the printer software. When the printer software has been set up, a small printer icon appears beside the printer name. If your printer software has already been set up and an icon appears beside the printer name, skip to step 6. To set up the software, continue with step 5.

5 Set up the printer.

m

To let the Chooser identify the type of printer and automatically set up the printer software, click Create.

By the way: Double-clicking the printer name is a shortcut for clicking the name and clicking Create.

m

To manually set up the printer software, press the Option key and click Create.

Click the name of the PostScript Printer Description file to be used with the printer and click Select.

A small printer icon appears beside the printer name.

6 If you want, you can repeat steps 4 and 5 to create desktop printer icons for other printers.

7 Close the Chooser.

After you click Create, the new desktop printer icon for the LaserWriter

12/640 PS appears on the desktop.

You can drag this icon to any position you want on your desktop or place it into a folder.

The last desktop printer created becomes the default printer. Your documents will automatically be printed on the default printer. For more information about selecting among available printers, see “Switching Between Printers” in

Chapter 6.

If this is your only desktop printer, you can’t get rid of the icon by dragging it to the Trash. (The icon will reappear if you do.) To get rid of the LaserWriter

12/640 PS desktop printer icon, you must first select a different desktop printer as the default printer and then drag the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer icon to the Trash. If you don’t want to use desktop printer icons, see “Turning

Off or Removing the Desktop Printing Software,” in Chapter 6, for more information.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 37

Making changes to the printer setup

If you change options on your printer, you must set up the printer again.

1 Select the desktop printer icon for the printer you want to set up.

2 Choose Change Setup from the Printing menu.

3 Click Auto Setup.

Printer options are displayed in the Setup dialog box. (Your screen may not look exactly like the illustration.)

38 Chapter 2

4 To change any options (for example, to change 500-sheet cassette and feeder to

“Installed and Preferred”), select the option from the Change pop-up menu and select its new value from the To pop-up menu.

5 When you’re done, click OK.

Step 3: Naming the printer and setting its zone

Once connected to an AppleTalk network, the printer will appear on the network with the name LaserWriter 12/640 PS. You can change this name, if you wish. You can use the Apple Printer Utility, installed in the Apple

LaserWriter Software folder, to name the printer.

When a printer is connected to an EtherTalk network with multiple logical zones, you can also set which zone the printer will be in. You can set the printer’s zone with the Apple Printer Utility.

See Appendix A for more information on using the Apple Printer Utility.

Step 4: Making sure everything is working

The best way to make sure everything is set up correctly is to print something.

As a simple print test, open and print one of the Read Me files that is in the

Apple LaserWriter Software folder.

1 Locate the Apple Printer Software Read Me file in the Apple LaserWriter Software folder.

2 Open the Apple Printer Software Read Me file and choose Print from the File menu

(or drag the Read Me file to the desktop printer icon and drop it on the printer).

The Print dialog box appears. If the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer’s name does not appear in the dialog box, see “Step 2: Choosing the Printer.”

3 Click Print.

If the document doesn’t print, check the steps you followed in Chapter 1 for connecting and turning on the printer. Also check that you have followed all the software installation steps presented in this chapter. Make sure that you have installed the toner cartridge and loaded paper into the paper cassette.

Check that no packing material or paper has caused a jam in the printer.

If the printer still will not print, turn to the troubleshooting chapters.

Indicator lights on the front of the printer blink to signal different errors and printing conditions, such as out of paper or a paper jam. You can also doubleclick the desktop printer icon to check the status messages that appear in the

Desktop PrintMonitor.

Configuring the printer

You may change some of the printer’s default settings using the Apple Printer

Utility. For more information on the Apple Printer Utility, see Appendix A. If you want to install any options, see Chapter 5. Then you can install the printer software on Mac OS–based computers on your network as explained in “Installing the Software From a Server,” next.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 39

Installing the software from a server

You can get Mac OS users started with the printer and the new printer software in whatever way you’re used to. If you’d prefer not to pass around the software disks, you can place the software on a server, as explained in the next section. If you prefer, you can of course install the software on each user’s computer yourself. If you have the users install their own software, make sure you give them: m the printer software and instructions for installing it m the name of the AppleTalk zone on which the printer is located m the name you gave the printer if you renamed it with the Apple

Printer Utility

Installing onto a server

If you prefer that users install their software from a network server rather than pass around the original floppy disks or CD-ROM disc, you must copy the LaserWriter installation software to a server as follows.

Preparing a server using the CD-ROM disc

The CD-ROM disc shipped with the printer contains a network installation folder. To prepare a server:

1 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

2 Double-click the disc icon, if necessary.

3 Double-click the MAC_OS folder, if necessary.

4 Double-click the SOFTWARE folder, if necessary.

5 Drag the INSTALL folder from the CD to your server.

Preparing a server using the floppy disks

1 Create a new folder on the server and rename it (for example, Network Install).

2 Insert LaserWriter Disk 1 for Mac OS.

40 Chapter 2

3 Drag the LaserWriter Disk 1 icon onto the icon of the folder.

IMPORTANT disk directly.

You must drag the disk icon rather than copy the contents of the

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each printer disk.

5 Open the folder you created in step 1.

The contents of each disk are contained in a folder named for that disk.

6 Open the LaserWriter Disk 1 folder.

7 Select the Installer and Installer Script icons and drag the icons from the LaserWriter

Disk 1 folder to the folder you created in step 1.

The Installer and the Installer Script need to be in the same window as the folders for the disks you copied.

IMPORTANT Be sure to tell the users in your group where to find the software and the name of the folder to look for on the server.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 41

42 Chapter 2

Installing the printer software from the server

After you’ve copied the software to the server as described earlier in

“Preparing a Server Using the CD-ROM Disc,” users can install the software on their own computers by following these steps:

1 Turn off any automatic virus-detection programs on your computer before installing the software.

If you don’t, problems may occur during the installation. After installation is complete, you can turn the virus-detection programs back on. (For instructions on turning off each virus-detection program, see the manual that came with the program, or telephone the manufacturer of the program.)

2 Log on to the server from the computer where you want to install the software.

3 Open the folder that contains the printer software.

4 Double-click the Installer icon.

A dialog box opens to describe the installation.

5 Click the Continue button to close the dialog box.

6 Click the Install button.

The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and then begins to copy files.

7 Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.

After the installation, the Installer tells you to restart your computer.

8 Click the Restart button.

The software is now installed and the printer is ready for use. If you turned off any automatic virus-detection programs on your computer, turn them back on now.

What to do next

The printer is now set up on your AppleTalk network. The table below can help you decide which chapter to go to next.

If you want to

Set up the printer for Windows, DOS, or NetWare users

Set up the printer for UNIX users

Install options

Print from a Mac OS–based computer

Print from a Windows 3.1 or DOS computer

Print from a Windows 95 computer

See

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

IMPORTANT See the oncreen user’s manual for information on how to use your Apple LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. The file is in Adobe Portable

Document Format (PDF). To read or print the documentation, you use the

Acrobat Reader software on the CD-ROM disc. The PDF file is located at

MAC_OS:Monochrome LaserWriter:LW12/640UM.pdf and

WIN_OS\MONO_LSR\LW12/640U.pdf on the CD-ROM disc.

Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 43

3

Setting Up the Printer for Windows,

DOS, and NetWare Users

This chapter describes how to set up the printer for use with IBM PC or compatible computers running Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows NT, or

DOS. It also provides detailed procedures for setting up the printer for use on a Novell NetWare network.

System requirements for Windows 95

To use the printer, your computer system must meet these requirements: m IBM PC or compatible, with an 80486 or higher CPU m hard disk drive m at least 8 MB of RAM m Microsoft Windows 95 m CD-ROM drive or 3.5-inch floppy disk drive that reads 1.44 MB disks m If you’re using the printer on a network, you must set up your network client software. You may use Client Software for NetWare Network from

Microsoft as your network client software.

Installing all the printer software requires approximately 3.5 MB of free space on your hard disk.

45

System requirements for Windows 3.1

To use the printer, your computer system must meet these requirements: m IBM PC or compatible, with an 80386 or higher CPU m hard disk drive m at least 4 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM) m Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher or Windows for Workgroups 3.11

or higher m MS-DOS version 3.3 or higher (5.0 or higher recommended) m CD-ROM drive or 3.5-inch floppy disk drive that reads 1.44 MB disks m NetWare requires an 80386 CPU with NetWare version 3.12 or higher

Installing all the printer software requires approximately 3.5 MB of free space on your hard disk.

Before you begin

Set up the printer as described in Chapter 1, remembering to m unpack and prepare the printer m connect the printer to your NetWare network using Ethernet cables or through a direct parallel connection to a PC m plug in and turn on the printer (Keep the startup page that automatically prints out. It provides the default printer name you need for setup.)

Setting up for DOS-based printing

If you will be printing from DOS applications only, you do not need to install any of the software that came with the printer. However, to print from a DOS application, you must first install the DOS PostScript driver if one exists for your DOS application. The DOS PostScript driver is usually supplied with the

DOS application. Follow your application’s instructions for installation and printing. See also “DOS Notes” in Chapter 7.

46 Chapter 3

Setting up for parallel port printing

Your LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer uses a standard parallel port. By default, your printer’s parallel port is ready to receive data, and you should not need to make any changes to either your computer’s or the printer’s parallel port setting.

Installing the printer software for Windows 95 and Windows 3.1

You must install the printer software on each computer that will print to the printer. You can do so by using the installation program that comes on the software disks included with the printer.

Note: Be sure you have Windows on your computer, before installing the printer software.

To install the Windows printer software, follow these steps. These instructions assume that you have a mouse or similar pointing device. If you do not, see the instructions that came with Windows to find out how to perform these steps using a keyboard.

Installing from the CD-ROM disc

Installing onto a Windows 95 computer

1 Start Windows 95.

Before installing the software, make sure the Control Panel and Printers folder are closed.

2 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

3 Open the directory on the CD called WIN_OS\WIN95\DISK1.

4 Double-click the setup.exe file.

After a few moments, a message appears warning you to close all other applications before continuing with this installation.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 47

48 Chapter 3

5 Click Next if you have no other open applications.

If you have open applications, click Cancel to stop this installation. Close all other applications and start the installation process again.

A message appears that lets you view the ReadMe file for late-breaking news.

6 Click Yes to view the ReadMe file.

7 When you have finished reading the ReadMe file, choose Exit from the File menu in the

WordPad application.

A Welcome dialog box is displayed that allows you to select Express

Installation, Custom Installation, or Printer Driver Only.

Express Installation installs all the software you need. It creates the Apple

LaserWriter Software program group and installs within it the ReadMe file and the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, which you use to name the printer and perform various printer administrative functions.

Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would like to install.

Printer Driver Only installs only the PostScript printer driver and printer description files.

8 Click Express Installation.

A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds.

9 Click Next when the Installer prompts you to add a PostScript printer to your system.

A message appears that lets you install the setup program onto your hard disk.

10 Select Yes, if desired, and click Next.

The Setup Program Location dialog box appears.

11 Enter a new directory for the setup program or use the default directory and click Next.

A message appears that lets you specify how your printer is connected (local or network).

12 Select how your printer is connected (local or network) and click Next.

The Install PostScript Printer from PPD dialog box appears.

13 Select the drive that holds your CD from the Drives list box.

14 Select Disk 3 from the Directories list.

15 Select LaserWriter 12/640 PS from the PostScript Printer Descriptions Available list and click Next.

16 Select LPT1 if the printer is connected to your local computer.

17 Click Next.

The Add Printer dialog box appears.

18 Name your computer and select other options as necessary.

19 Click Next.

The printer Properties dialog box appears.

20 Click OK to dismiss the Properties dialog box.

A message appears telling you that the driver software was successfully installed.

21 Click Add Another to install another Apple LaserWriter printer.

Repeat for each printer you want to install.

22 When you’re done, click Exit.

Installation is complete.

23 Choose how to proceed:

For users connected via the parallel cable, the default printer driver settings should suffice.

For instructions on using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see

Appendix A.

To configure your printer software with NetWare, see “Initial Novell

NetWare 4.1 Setup,” later in this chapter.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 49

50 Chapter 3

Installing onto a Windows 3.1 computer

1 Start Windows.

Before installing the software, make sure the Windows Control Panel and

Printers control panel are closed.

2 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

3 Using the File Manager, open the directory on the CD called WIN_OS\WIN31_NT\DISK1.

4 Double-click the setup.exe file.

After a few moments, a message appears warning you to close all other applications before continuing with this installation.

5 Click Continue if you have no other open applications.

If you have open applications, click Exit to stop this installation. Close all other applications and start the installation process again.

A message appears that lets you view the ReadMe file for late-breaking news.

6 Click Yes to view the ReadMe file.

7 When you have finished reading the ReadMe file, choose Exit from the File menu in the

Notepad application.

A Welcome dialog box is displayed that allows you to select Express

Installation, Custom Installation, Print Driver Only, or De-Install.

Express Installation installs all the software you need. It creates the Apple

LaserWriter Software program group and installs within it the ReadMe file and the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, which you use to name the printer and perform various printer administrative functions.

Print Driver Only installs the minimum software needed for printing only.

Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would like to install.

De-Install lets you remove previously installed LaserWriter software.

8 Click Express Install.

A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds.

`

9 Click Restart Windows.

After Windows restarts, the Adobe ™ PostScript Printers control panel appears.

10 Select the drive that holds your CD from the Drives list box (or select

WIN_OS\WIN31_NT\DISK2).

11 Select LaserWriter 12/640 PS from the PostScript Printer Descriptions Available list and click Install.

The PostScript printer driver files are installed on the hard disk. A message appears telling you that the driver software was successfully installed.

12 Click OK to dismiss the message.

13 Select another Apple LaserWriter printer, if you want, and click Install to install.

Repeat for each printer you want to install.

14 When you’re done, click Close.

A message appears telling you to use the Printers control panel to connect and set up the printers you’ve installed. By default, each printer uses LPT1.

The Printers control panel Setup dialog box lets you specify a different port, for example, LPT2, or a NetWare queue.

Installation is complete.

15 Choose how to proceed:

For users connected via the parallel cable, the default printer driver settings should suffice.

For instructions on using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see

Appendix A.

To configure your printer software with NetWare, see “Initial Novell

NetWare 4.1 Setup,” later in this chapter.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 51

52 Chapter 3

Installing onto a server

You can install the software on a server for users who share the server’s copy of Windows. Follow the steps given in “Installing From the CD-ROM Disc” and specify the appropriate server volumes and paths. Be sure that the client workstations have access to the server volumes and paths.

If you install Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 3.1 or Windows for

Workgroups 3.11 and a network drive and plan to let other people share the same directory, make the following changes to the SYSTEM.INI file on all

PC workstations that will be running the utility.

1 Open the SYSTEM.INI file.

2 Locate the [386Enh] section and add the following line:

DEVICE=VECPD.386

3 Disable the following DEVICE entries by prefixing the line with a semicolon (;). Your changes should look like this:

;DEVICE=*VPD

;DEVICE=LPT.386

You can also copy the software folders from the CD-ROM disc to a hard disk.

Your users can install the software from the server as described in “Installing

From the CD-ROM Disc,” earlier in this chapter.

Creating floppy disks from the CD-ROM disc

From a Windows 95 computer

You can create floppy disk copies of the printer software by using the standard features of Microsoft Windows 95.

1 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

2 Double-click the My Computer icon.

3 Double-click the drive that holds your CD.

A window appears that displays the contents of the CD.

4 Insert a blank floppy disk into the a: drive (or b: drive).

5 Double-click the drive that holds your floppy disk.

A window appears that displays the contents of the floppy disk.

6 Open the WIN_OS directory.

7 Drag the WIN95\DISK1 from the CD window to the floppy disk window.

8 Repeat steps 4 through 6 using the WIN95\DISK2 and WIN95\DISK3 directories.

From a Windows 3.1 computer

You can create floppy disk copies of the printer software by using the standard features of Microsoft Windows 3.1.

1 Open the File Manager.

2 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

3 Insert a blank floppy disk into the a: drive (or b: drive).

4 From the File Manager, open the WIN_OS\WIN31_NT\DISK1 directory on the CD.

5 Select Copy from the File menu.

6 Type *.* in the Source field and a: (or b: ) in the Destination field.

The files are copied to the floppy disk.

7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 using the WIN31_NT\DISK2 directory.

Installing from the floppy disks

Installing on a Windows 95 computer

1 Find the Windows disks containing the printer software and make sure they’re writeprotected.

Slide up the write-protection tab in one corner of the floppy disk so that you can see through the hole.

2 Start Windows 95.

Before installing the software, make sure the Windows Control Panel and

Printer folder are closed.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 53

54 Chapter 3

3 Insert LaserWriter Disk 1 for Windows 95 into a floppy disk drive.

Note: If you are installing from disks made from the CD, the floppy disk labels may be different.

4 Click the Start Icon on the Task-Bar and select Run.

5 Type a:\setup or b:\setup (depending on which drive holds your installation disk) in the command line field and click OK.

After a few moments, a message appears warning you to close all other applications before continuing with this installation.

6 Click Next if you have no other open applications.

If you have open applications, click Cancel to stop this installation. Close all other applications and start the installation process again.

A message appears that lets you view the ReadMe file for late-breaking news.

7 Click Yes to view the ReadMe file.

8 When you have finished reading the ReadMe file, choose Exit from the File menu in the

WordPad application.

A Welcome message is displayed that allows you to select Express

Installation, Custom Installation, or Printer Driver Only.

Express Installation installs all the software you need. It creates the Apple

LaserWriter Software program group and installs within it the ReadMe file and the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, which you use to name the printer and perform various printer administrative functions.

Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would like to install.

Printer Driver Only installs only the PostScript printer driver and printer description files.

9 Click Express Installation.

A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds.

Insert other printer disks (and click OK) as the program asks for them.

10 Click Next when the Installer prompts you to add a PostScript printer to your system.

A message appears that lets you install the setup program onto your hard disk.

11 Select Yes, if desired, and click Next.

The Setup Program Location dialog box appears.

12 Enter a new directory for the printer drivers or use the default directory and click Next.

A message appears that lets you specify how your printer is connected (local or network).

13 Select how your printer is connected (local or network) and click Next.

The Install PostScript Printer from PPD dialog box appears.

14 Eject LaserWriter Disk 2 for Windows 95 and insert LaserWriter Disk 3 for Windows 95.

The PostScript PPD files are located on LaserWriter Disk 3 for Windows 95.

15 Choose a: or b: (depending on which drive holds your installation disk) from the Drives list box.

16 Select LW 12/640 PS from the PostScript Printer Drivers Available list and click Next.

17 Select LPT1 if the LaserWriter 12/640 PS is connected to your local computer.

18 Click Next.

The Add Printer dialog box appears.

19 Name your printer and select other options as necessary.

20 Click Next.

The printer Properties dialog box appears.

21 Click OK to dismiss the Properties dialog box.

A message appears telling you that the driver software was successfully installed.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 55

56 Chapter 3

22 Click Add Another to install another Apple LaserWriter printer. Repeat for each printer you want to install.

You can install other Apple LaserWriter printers supported by the software.

23 When you’re done, click Exit.

Installation is complete.

24 Choose how to proceed:

For users connected via the parallel cable, the default printer driver settings should suffice.

For instructions on using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see

Appendix A.

To configure your printer software with NetWare, see “Initial Novell

NetWare 4.1 Setup,” later in this chapter.

Installing on a Windows 3.1 computer

1 Find the Windows disks containing the printer software and make sure they’re write-protected.

Slide up the write-protection tab in one corner of the floppy disk so that you can see through the hole.

2 Start Windows.

Before installing the software, make sure the Windows Control Panel and

Printers control panel are closed.

3 Insert LaserWriter Disk 1 for Windows 3.1 into a floppy disk drive.

4 From the Windows Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.

5 Type a:\setup or b:\setup (depending on which drive holds your installation disk) in the command line field and click OK.

After a few moments, a message appears telling you to close all other applications before continuing with this installation.

6 Click Continue if you have no other open applications.

If you have open applications, click Exit to stop this installation. Close all other applications and start the installation process again.

A message appears that lets you view the ReadMe file for late-breaking news.

7 Click Yes to view the ReadMe file.

8 When you have finished reading the ReadMe file, choose Exit from the File menu in the

Microsoft Write application.

A dialog box appears that allows you to select Express Installation, Custom

Installation, Printer Driver Only, or De-Install.

Express Installation installs all the software you need. It creates the Apple

LaserWriter Software program group and installs within it the Read Me file, the Apple Print Monitor for Windows, and the Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows which you use to name the printer and perform various printer administrative functions.

Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would like to install.

Printer Driver Only installs only the PostScript printer driver and printer description files.

De-Install lets you remove previously installed LaserWriter software.

9 Click Express Installation.

A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds.

Next, the Installer asks you to press a button to restart Windows.

10 Click Restart Windows.

After Windows restarts, the Adobe PostScript Printers control panel appears.

11 Remove LaserWriter Disk 1 for Windows 3.1 and insert LaserWriter Disk 2 for

Windows 3.1.

12 Select a: or b: (depending on which drive holds your installation disk) from the Drives list box.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 57

58 Chapter 3

13 Select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS and click Install.

The PostScript printer driver files and other software are installed on the hard disk. A message appears telling you that the driver software was successfully installed.

14 Click OK to dismiss the message.

15 Select another Apple LaserWriter printer, if you want, and click Install to install. Repeat for each printer you want to install.

You can install other Apple LaserWriter printers supported by the software.

16 When you’re done, click Close.

A message appears telling you to use the Printers control panel to connect and set up the printers you’ve installed. By default, each printer uses LPT1.

The Printers control panel Setup dialog box lets you specify a different port, for example, LPT2, or a NetWare queue.

17 Click OK to dismiss the message.

Installation is complete.

18 Choose how to proceed:

For users connected via the parallel cable, the default printer driver settings should suffice.

For instructions on using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see

Appendix A.

To configure your printer software with NetWare, see “Initial Novell

NetWare 4.1 Setup,” later in this chapter.

Installing the printer software for Windows NT

Installing onto a Windows NT 3.5x–based computer

These instructions install the printer on an Intel architecture Windows NT

3.5x Workstation. If you have a Windows NT 3.5x Server or other computer architecture, see the section “Installing Onto a Windows NT 3.5x–Based

Server or Non-Intel Computer” below.

1 Start Windows NT 3.5.

2 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

3 Using File Manager, open the directory on the CD called WIN_OS\WIN_31_NT\DISK1.

4 Double-click the setup.exe file.

The Welcome screen appears.

5 Select Custom Install and click Windows NT Printer Software. Make sure all other checkboxes are not checked.

6 Click Install.

Instructions for installing the Windows NT software appear.

7 Click Continue.

the Print Manager dialog box appears.

8 Select Create Printer from the Print Manager’s Printer menu.

The Create Printer dialog box appears.

9 Select Other in the Driver Combo box.

10 Type D:\WIN_OS\WIN31_NT\DISK2 when prompted by the Install Driver dialog box.

Replace d: with the letter of your CD-ROM drive.

11 Make sure the correct drive is listed in the Install Driver dialog box and click OK.

A list of printer drivers appears.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 59

60 Chapter 3

12 Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer and click OK.

13 Follow the instructions on the screen.

14 Click Continue and OK to complete the installation.

Installing onto a Windows NT 4.0–based computer

You can use the Windows NT 4.0 Add Printer Wizard to install the PostScript printer driver.

1 Start Windows NT 4.0.

2 Insert the Apple LaserWriter CD into the CD-ROM drive.

3 Using File Manager, open the directory on the CD called WIN_OS\WIN31_NT\DISK2.

4 Copy the APLWNT40.INF file and printer PPD file to your hard drive.

5 Click the Start Icon on the Task-Bar; select Settings and then Printers.

6 Double-click the Add Printer icon.

7 Follow the instructions on the screen until the list of known printers appears in the Add

Printer Wizard window.

8 Click Have Disk.

9 In the dialog box that appears, select the driver and directory where the APLWNT40.INF

file and printer PPD file are located.

You copied these files to your hard drive in step 4.

A list of printer models appears.

10 Select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer and click Next.

11 Follow the instructions on the screen to select the port.

The Add Printer Wizard prompts for the PostScript printer driver source directory.

12 Insert the Windows NT 4.0 CD-ROM disc into the the CD-ROM drive.

13 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.

Installing onto a Windows NT 3.5x–based server or non-Intel computer

Follow these steps to install the software on a Windows NT 3.5x server or non-Intel computer.

1 Copy the PRINTER.INF file located in the D:\WIN_OS\WIN31_NT\DISK2 directory of your

CD-ROM disc to a temporary directory on your hard disk drive.

This example uses c:\TEMP as the temporary directory.

2 If you are installing onto a Windows NT 3.5x Server: m Open the PRINTER.INF file with Notepad.

m Search for the [Source Media Description] session.

m Comment out the line for the NT Workstation.

m Uncomment the line for the NT Server.

m Save the file and exit Notepad.

3 Place your Windows NT CD-ROM disc into the CD-ROM drive.

This example uses d: as the CD-ROM drive. Be sure to use the letter that corresponds to your CD-ROM drive.

4 Double-click the “MS-DOS command prompt” icon in the Main program group.

5 Change to the appropriate directory by typing:

D:

CD \i386

The i386 directory is for Intel computers. You will need to change this directory according to your system. For example, \PPC is for a PowerPC ™ computer.

6 Expand the PostScript driver components to your temporary directory. The following command expands the files to the C:\TEMP directory.

EXPAND -R PSCR*.* C:\TEMP

Five files are expanded to your temporary directory: PSCRIPT.CNT,

PSCRIPT.DLL, PSCRIPT.HLP, PSCRIPT.SEP, and PSCRIPTUI.DLL.

7 Double-click the Print Manager icon located in the Main program group.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 61

8 Select Create Printer from the Print Manager’s Printer menu.

The Create Printer dialog box appears.

9 Select Other in the Driver Combo box.

10 Type the location of your PRINTER.INF file when prompted by the Install Driver dialog box.

A list of printer drivers appears.

11 Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer and click OK.

12 Follow the instructions on the screen.

13 Click Continue and OK to complete the installation.

Initial Novell NetWare 4.1 setup

NetWare 4.1 introduces the concept of a hierarchical tree database, called

NetWare Directory Services (NDS). NDS is different from the flat file database called the bindery used in earlier versions of NetWare. The printer does not support NDS. A NetWare command, SET BINDERY CONTEXT, allows a single level of the NDS directory tree to be specified as a virtual bindery location. Each time you use the NetWare 4.1 file server, set the file server’s bindery context by typing SET BINDERY CONTEXT at the console prompt.

The superuser account name also changes with NetWare 4.xx to Admin from

NetWare 3.xx’s name of Supervisor. The Supervisor account still exists in

NetWare 4.xx for backward compatibility, but it can’t actually be seen in the

NDS directory tree. The Admin account gives you full access to the entire

NetWare Directory Services tree. The Supervisor account only lets you see objects that are in its bindery context location in the tree. When following the steps below for setting up your printer on NetWare 4.1 as PSERVER, always use the NetWare Admin account.

Make sure that the NetWare network is set up and operating according to the instructions in the Novell NetWare documentation.

You should have access to the NetWare Printer Console utility, PCONSOLE, on the computer from which you will be setting up the printer and have the administrative privileges necessary to make changes to the network.

62 Chapter 3

Step 1: Choosing an operating mode

When setting up your printer for a NetWare network, you have a choice of three operating modes: m PSERVER mode, in which the printer emulates NetWare’s PSERVER software and functions as a dedicated print server m RPRINTER mode, in which the printer functions as a remote printer m ATPS (AppleTalk Print Spooler) mode, in which the printer functions as a remote AppleTalk printer

In PSERVER mode, the factory default, print jobs are stored in a queue on a specified file server and retrieved by the printer.

In RPRINTER mode, the printer depends on the NetWare print server software—either a NetWare Loadable Module (NLM), an RPRINTER.EXE

executable file, or a value-added process (VAP) running on top of the operating system—to manage printing. Print jobs are stored in a queue on a specified file server. When the printer is ready to print the job, the NetWare print server software copies the job to the printer.

In ATPS mode, the printer uses its AppleTalk protocol support to communicate with the Novell ATPS NetWare Loadable Module (NLM). The

NLM (included in the NetWare for Macintosh package from Novell) extends full queue and spooling services to Mac OS clients from a server-based software process.

There are advantages to each type of operating mode. Your choice will depend on your networking environment and the types of jobs you will be printing. Regardless of your choice, you can locate the printer anywhere on the network.

What to do next

Once you decide how you want to set up the printer, proceed as follows: m

PSERVER To set up the printer as a print server, read about how to use

PCONSOLE in the next section, then m if you want a simple setup, read “Step 2, Option A: Setting Up the

Printer as a Print Server (Using PCONSOLE),” later in this chapter.

m if you want to assign a password, read “Step 3: Assigning a Password for the Print Server (Optional),” later in this chapter.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 63

64 Chapter 3 m

RPRINTER To set up the printer as a remote printer, read about how to use

PCONSOLE in the next section, then skip to “Step 2, Option B: Setting Up the Printer as a Remote Printer (RPRINTER Mode),” later in this chapter.

For both PSERVER and RPRINTER, you must also follow the instructions in “Step 4: Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare,” later in this chapter.

For more information about using the Apple LaserWriter Utility, see

Appendix A.

Using PCONSOLE

PCONSOLE is a DOS-based utility for configuring printers on a NetWare network. This chapter provides information on the set of basic PCONSOLE operations required to set up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS. PCONSOLE is not provided with the printer. It comes with your NetWare software. Detailed information about PCONSOLE can be found in your NetWare documentation.

The descriptions of PCONSOLE in this guide assume the use of keyboard commands to navigate through the program and perform operations. With the installation of a DOS mouse driver, you can also use a mouse to make selections and choose options.

The table below lists some basic PCONSOLE key commands.

Command key

Esc (Escape)

Del (Delete)

F7

Alt-F10

Ins (Insert)

F1

Arrow keys

Description

Returns to the previous level

Deletes a selected item

Cancels changes

Exits the program

Inserts a new item for a list

Displays online help

Cycle through menu selections or entry fields

Step 2, option A: Setting up the printer as a print server

(using PCONSOLE)

There are five parts to setting up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS for

PSERVER mode: m Create a print server.

m Create a printer.

m Create a print queue.

m Set your printer to PSERVER mode.

m Turn the printer off and then back on to have the changes take effect.

Creating a print server

1 Restart the printer to print a startup page; then obtain the NetWare Printer Name.

This NetWare Printer Name is the name of the printer on a NetWare network.

It is also the default print server name.

2 Type SET BINDERY CONTEXT at the NetWare file server’s console prompt to ensure that the context has been set.

Be sure to write the context down, as it will be needed later.

3 Log in to the NetWare file server from a DOS client using the Admin account.

4 At the DOS prompt, type PCONSOLE and press Enter.

5 Use the arrow keys to highlight Change Context in the menu, and press Enter.

6 Change the PCONSOLE utility’s context to match the context set on the server (what you wrote down earlier), by pressing the Ins key, and selecting the correct context.

7 Use the arrow keys to highlight Print Servers in the menu, and press Enter.

8 Press the Ins key, then type the NetWare Printer Name (provided on the printer’s startup page), and press Enter.

The print server is created.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 65

66 Chapter 3

Creating a printer

1 Select the name of the print server you specified in the previous procedure and press Enter.

2 Use the arrow keys to highlight Printers in the Print Server Information menu, and press Enter.

This will let you configure the new print server.

3 Press the Ins key to display printers in your current context in the NetWare Directory

Services tree.

Note: You may have created a printer earlier. This example assumes that the printer has not yet been created.

4 Press the Ins key to create a new printer in the NetWare Directory Services tree.

Make sure that the context listed at the top of the screen still lists the server’s bindery context that was set earlier. If not, change to the correct context before creating the printer.

5 At the prompt, type the new printer name and press Enter.

This name will be used for reference, so use a name that will be meaningful to the NetWare administrator or to other users who may wish to check on the printer’s status. This step creates the printer object in the NDS tree.

6 Select the name of the printer you specified and press Enter.

This adds the printer to the Serviced Printers list of the print server.

7 From the Serviced Printers menu list, select the name of the printer you specified in the previous procedure, and press Enter.

This brings up the Printer Configuration menu.

8 From the Printer Configuration menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Printer type, and press Enter.

9 From the Printer Type menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Other/Unknown, and press Enter.

This makes your selection active, and brings you back to the Printer

Configuration menu.

10 From the Printer Configuration menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Banner type, and change the banner type from Text to PostScript.

Creating a print queue

1 From the Printer Configuration menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Print queues assigned, and press Enter.

This displays the Print Queue menu list.

2 Press the Ins key to display print queues in your current context in the NetWare

Directory Services tree.

For this example, you will create a new queue.

3 Press the Ins key to create a new print queue in the NetWare Directory Services tree.

The context listed at the top of the screen should still list the server’s bindery context that was set earlier. If it doesn’t, change to the correct context before creating the print queue.

4 At the prompt, type the new queue name and press Enter.

You are then asked for the NetWare volume to store your NetWare print queue jobs on. With NetWare 4 the NetWare queue does not have to exist on the

SYS volume. You can place the queue on any volume you choose. Use the Ins key to select the volume from the directory tree (you may need to navigate to a different context to select the volume desired).

5 Select the name of the queue you specified above and press Enter.

This adds the queue to the Print Queue list of the printer.

6 Press the Esc key until you are prompted to save your changes.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 67

68 Chapter 3

Completing the PSERVER configuration

1 Start Windows, if it’s not already running.

2 In the Program Manager window, open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group and double-click the Apple LaserWriter Utility icon.

3 Select your printer.

4 Select Print Server Configuration from the Network menu.

5 Select the printer you want to configure.

You can identify the printer from the NetWare printer name that is printed on the printer’s startup page.

IMPORTANT After the printer is turned on, it advertises itself on the NetWare network for 5 minutes only to reduce network traffic. If you don’t see your printer’s name in the list of printers, turn the printer off and back on. Make sure the NetWare file server is running, and verify that the NetWare file server and the printer are using the same Ethernet frame type. If the Ethernet frame types do not match, see “Connecting to a Network Printer Manually” in Appendix A. See also “Novell NetWare Troubleshooting” in Chapter 12.

6 Select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer you want, then click Configure.

7 Enter the PSERVER name.

Use the same printer name you used in PCONSOLE (if you are not using the default name).

8 Enter the same NetWare password that you entered with PCONSOLE.

9 Enter the names of file servers that the printer will service.

10 Click Add.

11 Click OK.

12 Enter the queue scan time.

The queue scan time is the number of milliseconds that the printer will wait before checking each file server that it can access.

13 Click Send.

Restarting the printer

1 Turn the printer off and then back on again.

2 Submit a print job to the printer to ensure it is working.

What to do next: The next section covers setting up the printer as a remote printer. If you want to assign a password on the server, see “Step 3: Assigning a Password for the Print Server (Optional).” Otherwise, see “Step 4: Setting

Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare.”

Step 2, option B: Setting up the printer as a remote printer

(RPRINTER mode)

There are six parts to setting up the printer for RPRINTER mode: m Create a print server.

m Create a printer.

m Create a print queue.

m Set your printer to RPRINTER mode.

m Start PSERVER on your NetWare 4.1 file server.

m Turn the printer off and then back on to have the changes take effect.

Creating a print server

1 Turn the printer off and back on; then retrieve the printer’s startup page.

2 Type SET BINDERY CONTEXT at the server’s console prompt to ensure that the context has been set.

Write the context down, as it will be needed later when creating the printer in the NetWare Directory Services tree.

3 Log in to a NetWare file server from a DOS client using the Admin account.

4 At the DOS prompt, type PCONSOLE , and press Enter.

5 Use the arrow keys to highlight Change Context in the menu, and press Enter.

6 Change the PCONSOLE utility’s context to match the context set on the server (what you wrote down in step 2) by pressing the Ins key and selecting the correct context.

7 Use the arrow keys to highlight Printer Servers in the menu, and press Enter.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 69

70 Chapter 3

8 Press the Ins key, then type a descriptive name for your printer server.

This can be any name, but in general you should be able to glance at the object and know what its purpose is (for example “12_640_Server”).

Creating a printer

1 Select the name of the print server you specified in “Step 2, Option A: Setting Up the

Printer as a Print Server (Using PCONSOLE)”; then press Enter.

2 Use the arrow keys to highlight Printers in the Print Server Information menu, and press Enter.

This lets you configure the new print server.

3 Press the Ins key to display printers in your current context in the NetWare Directory

Services tree.

4 Press the Ins key to create a new printer in the NetWare Directory Services tree.

The context listed at the top of the screen should still list the server’s bindery context that was set earlier. If this is not the case, change the context to the correct context before creating the printer.

5 At the prompt, type the new printer name and press Enter.

6 Select the name of the printer you specified in the previous procedure and press Enter.

This adds the printer to the Serviced Printers list of the print server.

Creating a print queue

1 From the Serviced Printers menu list, select the name of the printer you specified in the previous procedure, and press Enter.

A Printer Configuration menu appears.

2 From the Printer Configuration menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Printer type, and press Enter.

3 From the Printer Type menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Other/Unknown, and press Enter.

This makes your selection active, and brings you back to the Printer

Configuration menu.

4 From the Printer Configuration menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Banner type, and change the banner type from Text to PostScript.

5 From the Printer Configuration menu, use the arrow keys to highlight Print queues assigned, and press Enter.

The Print Queue list appears.

6 Press the Ins key to display print queues in your current context in the NetWare

Directory Services tree.

For this example, you will create a new queue.

7 Press the Ins key to create a new print queue in the NetWare Directory Services tree.

The context listed at the top of the screen should still list the server’s bindery context that was set earlier. If it doesn’t, change to the correct context first before creating the print queue.

8 At the prompt, type the new queue name and press Enter.

Next you will be asked for the NetWare volume on which to store your

NetWare print queue jobs on. With NetWare 4.xx, the NetWare queue does not have to exist on the SYS volume. You can place the queue on any volume you choose. Use the Ins key to select the volume from the directory tree. You may need to navigate to a different context to select the volume desired.

9 Select the name of the queue you specified in the previous step and press Enter.

This adds the queue to the Print Queue list of Printers.

10 Press the Esc key until you are prompted to save your changes.

Completing the RPRINTER configuration

1 Start Windows, if it’s not already running.

2 Open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group and double-click the Apple

LaserWriter Utility icon.

3 Select the printer to configure and click OK.

4 Choose Print Server Configuration from the Network menu.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 71

72 Chapter 3

5 Click the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer you want, then click Configure.

Use the printer’s NetWare printer name to identify the printer to configure.

6 Click Remote Printer.

7 Enter the name of the print server NLM in the Remote Printer Name field.

8 Enter the same printer number used by PCONSOLE for this printer.

9 Click Send.

Starting PSERVER on your 4.1 file server m

Start PSERVER on your 4.1 file server by typing LOAD PSERVER

<Print_Server_Name> .

Restarting the printer

1 Turn the printer off and then back on again.

2 Submit a print job to the printer to ensure it is working.

What to do next: If you want to assign a password on the server, see “Step 3:

Assigning a Password for the Print Server (Optional)” next. Otherwise, see

“Step 4: Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare.”

Step 3: Assigning a password for the print server (optional)

You can use PCONSOLE to assign a password for printing privileges.

However, if you assign a password in PCONSOLE, you must also use the

Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows to specify the same password, as described in “Completing the PSERVER Configuration” earlier in this chapter. (The password specified in PCONSOLE tells the file server what to expect; the password specified with the Apple LaserWriter Utility tells the printer what to send.)

1 Select Print Servers from the Available Options menu in PCONSOLE and press Enter.

The list of print servers appears.

2 Select the name of the print server for which you want to assign a password and press Enter.

The Print Server Information menu appears.

Printers

Information and Status

Users

Operators

Serviced Netware Servers

Description

Password

Audit

3 Select Password and press Enter.

4 At the prompt, type the password and press Enter.

PCONSOLE asks you to retype the password. (The characters are not displayed as you type.)

5 Retype the password and press Enter.

IMPORTANT Record the password for later use. If multiple file servers will be served by the same printer, the same password must be used on each server.

6 Press Esc once; then to save the change, press Enter.

7 To return to the Available Options menu, press Esc three times.

Step 4: Setting up the PostScript printer driver for NetWare

For Windows 95

1 Click the Start icon on the Task-Bar and select Printer Settings.

2 Select the printer you want to use.

3 Select Properties from the File menu.

4 Click the Detail Property tab.

5 Click Add Port.

6 Click Browse to view the available print queues that have been defined with PCONSOLE.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 73

74 Chapter 3

7 Select the print queue you want to use and click OK.

8 Click OK again.

9 Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows 3.1

1 In Windows, double-click Control Panel.

2 Double-click Printers.

3 Select the printer you want to use.

4 Click Connect.

The Connect dialog box opens.

5 Click Network. The NetWare Printer Connections dialog box opens.

6 Select the queue and the port the printer is assigned to.

7 Click Capture, then click Close to close the dialog box.

8 Select the queue and port combination you specified in step 6 and click OK.

9 In the Printer control panel, select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS as the default printer and click Close.

Step 5: Making sure everything is working

When you have finished configuring your printer as a dedicated print server or a remote printer, you can print, from a Windows application, a document such as the ReadMe file to verify that you can print to the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

Installing Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager

You can install Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager for use with your computer and the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. See the documentation accompanying Adobe Type Manager for information on installing and using the software.

What to do next

The printer is now set up on your network. The table below can help you decide which chapter to go to next.

If you want to

Set up the printer for UNIX users

Install options

Print from a Mac OS–based computer

Print from a Windows 3.1 or DOS computer

Print from a Windows 95 computer

See

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

IMPORTANT See the oncreen user’s manual for information on how to use your Apple LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. The file is in Adobe Portable

Document Format (PDF). To read or print the documentation, you use the

Acrobat Reader software on the CD-ROM disc. The PDF file is located at MAC_OS:Monochrome LaserWriter:LW12/640UM.pdf and

WIN_OS\MONO_LSR\LW12/640U.pdf on the CD-ROM disc.

Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 75

4

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users

This chapter explains how to prepare the printer for UNIX users. Users’ computers must be connected to the printer by an Ethernet network using

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).

Before you begin

Set up the printer as described in Chapter 1, remembering to m unpack and prepare the printer m connect the printer to your TCP/IP network using Ethernet cables m plug in and turn on the printer (Keep the startup page that automatically prints out. It contains information you’ll need.)

77

Initial TCP/IP setup

Before UNIX users can use the printer, the printer administrator must assign an IP address for the printer, as described in the following sections.

Background information

TCP/IP is a protocol commonly used to connect UNIX systems over Ethernet networks. Every TCP/IP device must have a unique IP address. Much of the initial work the printer administrator must do is related to assigning an IP address (and other associated information) to the printer.

Step 1: Installing the printer software

You don’t need to install any special UNIX software to administer the printer.

You can control many features of the printer’s TCP/IP interface by using the

Apple Printer Utility program on a Mac OS–based computer or LaserWriter

Utility for Windows on a Windows-based computer (see Appendix A).

Step 2: Obtaining an IP address for the printer

To be recognized on your TCP/IP network, your printer must be assigned an

IP address. Part of the address identifies your site; the other part uniquely identifies the device. Most sites have a network administrator who dispenses

IP addresses for all new network devices. Contact your network administrator for an IP address for the printer.

WARNING If your TCP/IP network contains devices with duplicate or incorrect IP addresses, you may experience unpredictable network behavior, or your network may cease to function. Make sure you obtain a valid and unique IP address for the printer.

78 Chapter 4

Step 3: Assigning an IP address to the printer

When you unpack the printer, it has a unique permanent factory-assigned

Ethernet address, but no IP address. To assign an IP address to the printer, you can use any one of the following methods, which are described more fully in the sections that follow: m ping assignment Any printer administrator with superuser privileges can use this method, which is sometimes called gleaning. If your network has neither RARP nor BOOTP services, and you have no access to Windows or

Mac OS–based computers, you must use this method.

m

Apple Printer Utility for Mac OS and LaserWriter Utility for Windows If your network includes a Mac OS–based computer or Windows computer, you can use one of these utility programs to set the printer’s IP address.

m

RARP (Remote Address Resolution Protocol) If your network has a RARP server, you can use this method.

m

BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) If your network has a BOOTP server, you can use this method.

These methods are described below. Choose which section applies to you, and skip the others.

How the printer obtains an IP address during normal operation

When the printer is initially installed, it has no IP address. The address is shown as 0.0.0.0

. When the printer is turned on, it attempts to obtain an

IP address through RARP and BOOTP. If successful, the printer retains this address in nonvolatile memory and continues to use it unless it receives a different address from RARP or BOOTP when it is restarted.

When the IP address is set through the Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS, the Apple Printer Utility for Windows, or telnet , the printer no longer makes a RARP or BOOTP request when restarted. An IP address set in this manner is called a permanent address. For more information on using these utilities, see Appendix A.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 79

80 Chapter 4

If the IP address is set through ping assignment (described below), the printer attempts to obtain an address through RARP and BOOTP when turned on. If unsuccessful, the printer continues to use the IP address set through the ping assignment. To disable RARP and BOOTP requests completely, set the IP address permanently through telnet or one of the other utilities.

The ping command sends an ICMP Echo Request packet to the printer.

The destination fields in this packet contain the printer’s Ethernet address and its IP address. The printer accepts the ICMP packet because it recognizes its own Ethernet address. It then sets it own IP address to the address contained in the packet’s IP destination address field.

Note: Setting the IP address works only with ICMP packets that specify the printer’s Ethernet address in their destination field. Multicast or broadcast packets will not be accepted.

Printer IP address assignment, option A: Using ping assignment

Any printer administrator with superuser privileges can use the ping assignment method to assign the printer’s IP address and store it in the printer’s nonvolatile memory (so it remembers the address even when the printer is turned off).

Note: This method works only when the printer has no IP address. If you’ve already set the printer’s IP address, you cannot change it by using this method.

1 Turn on the printer and save the startup page that prints out.

2 Log in as root to any UNIX workstation on the same subnet as the printer.

3 Add the following line to the /etc/hosts table on your workstation: printer_IP_address printer_IP_name

You obtain the printer IP address from your network administrator. You choose the printer IP name yourself (if it was not assigned by the network administrator). It must follow the naming convention of your system, which generally means it must contain fewer than 32 characters and no special characters.

Example

80.20.4.78 LaserWriterFloor2

4 Type the following command to force an entry into your system’s arp table: arp -s printer_IP_name printer_Ethernet_address

The printer IP name is the same name you used in step 3. You obtain the

Ethernet address from the startup page that prints automatically when you turn on the printer. The address appears next to the top icon on the page.

Example

If your startup page showed that your Ethernet address was

08:00:07:2b:48:fb, you would type arp -s LaserWriterFloor2 08:00:07:2b:48:fb

5 Type the following ping command to store the printer IP address in the printer’s memory: ping printer_IP_name

The printer IP name is the same name you used in steps 3 and 4.

Example ping LaserWriterFloor2

Normally, the ping command would result in a message telling you the device received the ping command; however, the printer will not respond this first time, though it will respond normally in the future.

The address is now stored in the printer’s memory, and you’re ready to test whether the printer is working.

6 To test the connection, once again type the ping command from a workstation on the same subnet as the printer: ping printer_IP_name

If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the network, the address assignment was successful.

If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 81

82 Chapter 4

7 Skip to “Step 4: Configuring Users’ Workstations,” later in this chapter.

Printer IP address assignment, option B: Using Mac OS or Windows utilities

If you have a Mac OS–based computer connected to the printer, you can use the Apple Printer Utility to assign the printer’s IP address, as described in

Appendix A.

If you have a Windows-based computer connected to the printer, you can use the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows to assign the printer’s IP address, as described in Appendix A.

After you have assigned the printer’s IP address, skip to “Step 4: Configuring

Users’ Workstations,” later in this chapter.

Printer IP address assignment, option C: Using a RARP or BOOTP server

If your network has a RARP or BOOTP server on the same subnet as the printer, you can use it to assign the IP address to the printer. Each time the printer is turned on, it will automatically broadcast a request to RARP and

BOOTP servers, which will search a configuration file that maps the printer’s built-in Ethernet address to the IP address that you assign.

Your network documentation explains how to add the printer’s information to the RARP or BOOTP configuration file.

For troubleshooting information about RARP and BOOTP, see Chapter 12.

Step 4: Configuring users’ workstations

You can now set up users’ workstations.

m If you’re using Sun Solaris, see “Configuring Sun Solaris,” next.

m If you’re using Sun OS version 4.1, see “Configuring Sun OS Version 4.1,

Ultrix, A/UX, or Other BSD Systems,” later in this chapter.

m If you’re using HP-UX, see “Configuring HP-UX Version 8.07” or

“Configuring HP-UX Version 9.x,” later in this chapter.

m If you’re using SCO UNIX, see “Configuring SCO UNIX,” later in this chapter.

m If you’re using IBM AIX, see “Configuring IBM AIX Version 3.x,” later in this chapter.

m If you’re using a Silicon Graphics workstation, see “Configuring Silicon

Graphics IRIX,” later in this chapter.

Configuring Sun Solaris

1 Log in as root .

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

4 Run admintool.

admintool &

5 Select Print Manager.

6 From the Browse menu, choose Printers.

7 From the Edit menu, choose Add and then Access to Printer.

8 Enter the queue name that you want to use in the Printer Name field.

9 Enter the printer’s IP name in the Print Server field.

10 Click Add.

11 In a command shell window, type the following command lpadmin -p < queuename> -s<printer’sIP_name>!postscript

12 Exit admintool and test the installation by printing a file.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 83

84 Chapter 4

Configuring Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix, A/UX, or other BSD systems

1 Log in as root .

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

If you’re using Network Information Service (NIS), see the NIS manual for instructions on setting up an IP name and address.

4 Make sure the lpd daemon is running on the Sun-OS or Ultrix system by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt: ps aux | grep lpd

If the lpd daemon is running, you should see output similar to root 135 0.0 0.0 52 0 ? IW Oct 17 0:01 /usr/lib/lpd

If the lpd daemon is not running, you will not see any output, and you should start the daemon by logging in as root and typing this command at the UNIX prompt:

/usr/lib/lpd

You can verify that the daemon is running by using the ps command described in this step.

Note: To start the lpd daemon automatically when the system boots, add the lpd command to the /etc/rc file. The following is an example

/etc/rc file (syntax varies across operating systems): if [ -f /usr/lib/lpd ] ; then rm -f /dev/printer /var/spool/lpd.lock

/usr/lib/lpd;echo -n ' printer' fi

5 Add the following entry to the /etc/printcap file: printer_queue_name |[ description_of_ printer ]:\

:lp=:mx#0:rm= printer_IP_name :\

:rp= printer_queue_name :\

:sd= path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory :\

:lf= path_to_this_queue’s_log_ file :

Fill in the parameters in italics as follows: m Replace printer_queue_name with the name the user should use to reference the printer.

m Replace description_of_printer with a comment describing the printer.

m Replace printer_IP_name with the IP name you assigned to the printer in

“Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

m Replace path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory with the pathname of the unique directory created for this queue.

m Optionally replace path_to_this_queue’s_log_ file with the unique pathname of the file where error information from the lpd command will be logged.

Here’s an example of a printcap entry:

Example

GarysLW|[LaserWriter_12_640_PS]:\

:lp=:mx#0:rm=LaserWriterFloor2:\

:rp=GarysLW:\

:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/GarysLW:\

:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/printerlog

6 Create and set the privileges for the spool directory specified in step 5: mkdir path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory

Example mkdir /usr/spool/lpd/GarysLW chown daemon /usr/spool/lpd/GarysLW chgrp daemon /usr/spool/lpd/GarysLW chmod 775 /usr/spool/lpd/GarysLW

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 85

86 Chapter 4

7 To test the connection, type the ping command from a workstation on the same subnet as the printer: ping printer_IP_name

If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the network, the address assignment was successful.

If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

8 Try printing by using this command: lpr -P queue_name filename

Note that there’s no space between -P and queue_name.

Example lpr -PGarysLW file.postscript

If everything is working, the pages will print. If there’s a problem, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

Configuring HP-UX version 8.07

1 Log in to the system console as root .

The System Administration Manager (SAM) uses a screen-oriented interface that works best at the console.

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

4 Run the SAM utility by typing sam at the UNIX prompt.

5 Select the following options, in order, from the SAM menu:

Peripheral devices

Printers and Plotters

Actions

Add a Remote Printer (Do not select “Add a Network Printer.”)

A form appears for you to define a remote printer.

6 Enter information into the remote printer form, as follows: m

Printer name Type the local queue name users will use as the name for the printer.

m

Remote system name Type the IP name assigned to the printer as described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

m

Remote printer name Type raw m

Remote cancel model Used for remote printer job removal; type rcmodel m

Remote status model Used for remote printer queue status; type rsmodel m

Make this the system default printer? (y or n) Type y to make this printer the default printer for all workstations on this segment of the network.

m

Printer class Optional m

Restrict cancel Optional m

Remote printer on a BSD system? (y or n) Because this printer is a Berkeleystyle remote printer, type y

7 Choose Perform Task from the SAM menu.

8 To enable the print queue you just created, choose the following items from the SAM menu, in order:

Peripheral Devices

Printers and Plotters

Enable a Printer

9 When SAM asks for the printer name, type the IP name assigned to the printer as described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

10 Leave SAM.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 87

88 Chapter 4

11 Start the LP request scheduler by typing

/usr/lib/lpsched

12 To test the connection, once again type the ping command from a workstation on the same subnet as the printer: ping printer_IP_name

If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the network, the address assignment was successful.

If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

13 Test printing with the following command: lp -d queue_name filename

If the test print doesn’t work

If the test document doesn’t print, follow these steps:

1 Check whether the rlp daemon is running. At the UNIX prompt, type ps -e | grep rlp

If the process is running, you will see one or more lines of text; if it is not running, you will see no response.

2 If rlp is running—that is, you saw one or more lines of text in step 1—kill the process by typing kill -15 process_number_ from_step_1

3 Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/inetd.conf

file: printer stream tcp nowait root

/usr/lib/rlpdaemon rlpdaemon -i

This line tells inetd to start the rlp daemon automatically when a print request is made (if it’s not already running).

4 Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/services file: printer 515/tcp spooler

5 Start inetd by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt:

/etc/inetd -c

6 Repeat the steps in “Configuring HP-UX Version 8.07.”

Configuring HP-UX version 9.x

You must configure the printer as a remote printer, not as a network printer.

1 Log in to the system console as root .

The System Administration Manager (SAM) uses a screen-oriented interface that works best at the console.

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

4 Run the SAM utility by typing sam at the UNIX prompt.

5 Select the following options, in order, from the SAM menu:

Printers and Plotters

Printers/Plotters

Actions

Add a Remote Printer/Plotter (Do not select “Add a Network

Printer.”)

A form appears for you to define a remote printer.

6 Enter information into the remote printer form as follows: m

Printer name Type the local queue name users will use as the name for the printer.

m

Remote system name Type the IP name assigned to the printer as described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

m

Remote printer name Type raw

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 89

90 Chapter 4 m

Remote cancel model Used for remote printer job removal; type rcmodel m

Remote status model Used for remote printer queue status; type rsmodel m

Printer class Optional m

Make this the system default printer?

Check the box to make this printer the default printer for all workstations on this segment of the network.

m

Allow anyone to cancel requests Check this box if anyone should be able to cancel requests.

m

Remote printer on a BSD system?

Because this printer is a Berkeley-style remote printer, check this box.

7 Select the OK button.

A message appears asking you whether you want to add the printer to the

Printer’s subpanel.

8 Click Yes or No.

9 Click OK.

10 Choose Exit from the File menu.

11 Click the Exit SAM button.

12 To test the connection, type the ping command from a workstation on the same subnet as the printer: ping printer_IP_name

If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the network, the address assignment was successful.

If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

13 Test printing with the following command: lp -d queue_name filename

If the test print doesn’t work

If the test document doesn’t print, check the configuration by following these steps:

1 Check whether the rlp daemon is running. At the UNIX prompt, type ps -e | grep rlp

If the process is running, you will see one or more lines of text; it it is not running, you will see no response.

2 If rlp is running—that is, you saw one or more lines of text in step 1—kill the process by typing kill -15 process_number_ from_step_1

3 Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/inetd.conf

file: printer stream tcp nowait root /usr/lib/rlpdaemon rlpdaemon -i

This line tells inetd to start the rlp daemon automatically when a print request is made (if it’s not already running).

4 Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/services file: printer 515/tcp spooler

5 Start inetd by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt:

/etc/inetd -c

6 Repeat the steps in “Configuring HP-UX Version 9.x.”

Configuring SCO UNIX

To configure Santa Cruz Operation (SCO) version 1.2 or later of UNIX, follow these steps:

1 Log in to the SCO machine as root .

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 91

92 Chapter 4

4 At the UNIX prompt, type mkdev rlp

5 When the mkdev program asks if you want to install or remove remote line printing, choose install even if it is already installed.

6 If remote line printing is already installed, the program will ask if you want to continue installing the system. Answer “no” and skip to step 10.

7 If remote line printing is not already installed, the program will ask if you wish to change the /etc/printcap file. Answer “no.”

8 The program then asks if you want to run /etc/rlpconf . Answer “no.”

9 When asked if you want to start the remote daemon, answer “yes.”

You return to the UNIX prompt.

10 Add the following entry to the /etc/printcap file.

printer_queue_name| [ description_of_ printer ]:\

:lp=:mx#0:rm= printer_IP_name :\

:rp= printer_queue_name :\

:sd= path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory :\

:lf= path_to_this_queue’s_log_ file :

Fill in the parameters in italics as follows: m Replace printer_queue_name with the name the user should use to reference the printer.

m Replace description_of_printer with a comment describing the printer.

m Replace printer_IP_name with the IP name you assigned to the printer in

“Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

m Replace path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory with the pathname of the unique directory created for this queue.

m Optionally replace path_to_this_queue’s_log_ file with the unique pathname of the file where error information from the lpd command will be logged.

11 Create the spool directory that you specified in step 10: mkdir path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory

12 To test the connection, type the ping command from a workstation on the same subnet as the printer: ping printer_IP_name

If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the network, the address assignment was successful.

If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

13 Test printing with the following command: lp -d queue_name filename

Configuring IBM AIX version 3.x

1 Log in as root .

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

4 At the UNIX prompt, type the following to run the SMIT utility: smit

5 To add a remote queue, choose the following items from the SMIT menu:

Print System Management

Add a Print Queue

Remote

Standard Processing

A form appears for you to define a remote printer.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 93

94 Chapter 4

6 Enter information into the remote printer form, as follows: m

Name of queue to add Type the local queue name users will use as the name for the printer.

m

Host name of remote server Type the printer IP name assigned to the printer as described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

m

Name of queue on remote printer Type raw m

Type of print spooler or remote server Select BSD.

7 Click Do.

8 Click Done.

9 Choose Exit from the Exit menu.

10 To test the connection, once again type the ping command from a workstation on the same subnet as the printer: ping printer_IP_name

If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the network, the address assignment was successful.

If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting suggestions in Chapter 12.

11 Try printing by using this command: lpr -P queue_name filename

Note that there’s no space between -P and queue_name.

Configuring Silicon Graphics IRIX

1 Log in as root .

2 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an

IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.

3 Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.

4 In the Printer Manager, choose Add from the Printer menu.

5 Enter the queue name that you want to use in the Printer Name field.

6 Choose Network connection type.

7 Enter the printer’s IP name in the Remote Host Name field.

8 Click Apply.

9 Exit the Printer Manager and test the installation by printing a file.

Configuring the printer

Though the printer itself has no control panel, you can configure it by using programs on computers connected to the printer: m On Mac OS–based computers, use the Apple Printer Utility and the

Chooser’s setup function, described in Appendix A.

m On Windows-based computers, use the Apple Printer Utility for Windows, described in Appendix A.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 95

96 Chapter 4

Changing the communication settings

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS default communication setting for the TCP/IP interface is PostScript. If the printer is to be used for PostScript and PCL5

(text) files, you must change the communication setting to AutoSelect, which turns on automatic language sensing. Automatic language sensing allows the printer to receive information over the network and determine which pagedescription language is required.

Use the printer utility (Mac OS or Windows) to change the communication setting to AutoSelect. If there are no Mac OS–based computers or

Windows-based computers on your network, you can download a file to the printer that changes the communication setting to AutoSelect.

Set up your printer for UNIX users as described in this chapter before changing the communication setting.

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position.

2 Using a text editor, create a file with the following contents:

%!PS

(%LPR_NV%) <</Interpreter /AutoSelect >> setdevparams

3 Download the file to the printer.

For example: lpr filename

4 Turn the printer off and back on again.

5 Examine the startup page to make sure the TCP/IP port is set to AutoSelect.

To restore the TCP/IP interface to PostScript:

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Reset (out) position.

2 Turn the printer off and back on again.

3 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position.

What to do next

The printer is now set up on your network.

You don’t need any special software to use the printer. On most UNIX systems, you use either the lpr or lp command to print documents over a

TCP/IP network to the printer.

Your printer administrator will generally set up two print queues for the printer—one to print text files (which must have a carriage return appended to the end of each line) and the other to print all other files, including

PostScript and PCL files. The names of the print queues typically reflect which sort of document they’re for.

Examples for lpr lpr -PGarysLW_text plain.txt

lpr -PGarysLW_raw postscript.file

Examples for lp lp -d GarysLW_text plain.txt

lp -d GarysLW_text postscript.file

The way you print and choose printing options can differ from one application program to another. To find out more about printing from your application programs, read the documentation that came with the programs.

IMPORTANT See the onscreen user’s manual for information on how to use your Apple LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. The file is in Adobe Portable

Document Format (PDF). To read or print the documentation, you use the

Acrobat Reader software on the CD-ROM disc. The PDF file is located at

MAC_OS:Monochrome LaserWriter:LW12/640UM.pdf and

WIN_OS\MONO_LSR\LW12/640U.pdf on the CD-ROM disc.

Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 97

5

Installing Options

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS has several user-installable printer options.

You can add a duplex printing unit, a 500-sheet cassette and feeder, an envelope cassette (the envelope cassette fits into the 500-sheet feeder), and a face-up output tray. You can also increase the printer’s random-access memory (RAM).

This chapter provides instructions for installing your paper-handling options and increasing RAM.

WARNING When installing any of the options described in this chapter, except for the face-up output tray, be sure the printer is turned off.

99

Many of the installation procedures describe working with the printer’s left and right sides and front and rear, as shown in the following illustration.

Left side (has removable cover) Rear side (ports)

Front side Right side

Installing the duplex printing unit

With the optional duplex printing unit, you can print on both sides of the paper (often called duplex printing or two-sided printing). You can only duplex print from the paper cassettes. You cannot duplex print from the multipurpose tray.

Note: The duplex printing unit requires a minimum of 12 MB memory in the printer. For instructions on adding printer RAM, see “Increasing the Printer

RAM,” later in this chapter.

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

20 MB

24 MB

100 Chapter 5

Follow these instructions for installing the LaserWriter 12/640 PS duplex printing unit.

Before you install the duplex printing unit: m The printer must be turned off and the power cord unplugged.

m The printer must be disconnected from your computer or network.

The duplex printing unit adds approximately 2 inches to the height and

4 inches to the depth of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS. Begin by selecting a location for the LaserWriter 12/640 PS that provides enough room to accommodate the increased height and depth of the printer.

If you intend to keep the printer in its current location, make sure that adequate room will be available for opening the top cover and the duplex printing unit door, and maintaining the printer. You will also need to temporarily move the LaserWriter 12/640 PS from its current location to place the duplex printing unit in its place. When moving the printer, be sure to place it on a strong, flat, and, stable surface that can support its weight.

IMPORTANT You must remove the optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder from the LaserWriter 12/640 PS if it is already attached. The duplex printing unit must be installed between the LaserWriter 12/640 PS and the 500-sheet cassette and feeder. For instructions on removing the 500-sheet cassette and feeder, see “Removing the 500-sheet Cassette and Feeder” later in this chapter.

1 Turn off and unplug the printer, and disconnect the network cables.

2 Unpack the duplex printing unit and remove any packing materials. Set aside the small package of items.

Installing Options 101

102 Chapter 5

3 Lift up the back end of the duplex printing unit and slide the metal brace onto the post.

The brace is located on the left side of the duplex printing unit near the back.

1 Raise the door.

2 Attach this brace to the post.

4 Unpack the duplex printing unit key.

5 Remove the three covers located in the back of the printer. Remove the two top covers by inserting the key into the side of the covers and pushing gently on the key (the covers will snap off). Remove the bottom cover by inserting the key into the bottom side of the cover and pushing downward (you may need to use some force to remove this cover).

Insert the key into these slots.

IMPORTANT Be careful when removing the covers so that they do not fall inside the LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

6 Place the bottom cover and the duplex printing unit key in a safe place in case you need them in the future.

If you decide to remove the duplex printing unit, use the cover to prevent dust and other material from getting inside the printer.

7 Place the duplex printing unit where you want the LaserWriter 12/640 PS to be located.

Orient the duplex printing unit so that its tray and the printer’s multipurpose tray and paper cassette will be on the same side when the printer is attached.

8 Insert the paper guide for the duplex printing unit into the opening in back of the printer.

Hint: There are two tabs on the bottom of the paper guide that fit into slots in the back of the printer. When inserting the paper guide, slide it back and forth to easily locate these slots.

The paper guide helps direct the paper to the duplex printing unit.

Installing Options 103

104 Chapter 5

9 Insert the locking connectors into the slots located on the bottom of the paper guide and push the connectors until they snap into place.

The locking connectors secure the paper guide to the printer.

10 Lift the LaserWriter 12/640 PS, position it directly over the duplex printing unit and gently lower the printer until it sits evenly on the duplex printing unit.

Position the printer over these three posts.

As you lower the printer, align the corners of the printer directly over those of the duplex printing unit.

Installing Options 105

11 Remove the cassette from the printer and the tray from the duplex printing unit.

12 Insert the four locking connectors into the slots located on the front and back of the printer and duplex printing unit.

106 Chapter 5

The locking connectors secure the printer to the duplex printing unit.

13 Insert the cassette into the printer and the tray into the duplex printing unit.

14 Gently close the duplex printing unit door until it latches into place against the printer. If the door does not close easily, check to make sure the brace is not locked in place.

15 Reconnect the power cable to the printer and reconnect the printer to the network, then turn on the printer.

16 Configure your printer to use the duplex printing unit.

For configuration instructions, see “Configuring Your Printer Software for

New Options,” later in this chapter.

For information about printing options, m see Chapter 6 if you are using the Mac OS m see Chapter 7 if you are using Windows 3.1 or DOS m see Chapter 8 if you are using Windows 95

Installing Options 107

Installing the 500-sheet cassette and feeder

Follow these instructions for installing the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

For instructions on loading the feeder with paper, see “Filling the Optional

500-Sheet Cassette” in Chapter 9.

Before you install the 500-sheet feeder: m The printer must be turned off and the power cord unplugged.

m The printer must be disconnected from your computer or network.

The cassette base adds approximately 5 inches to the height of the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS. Begin by selecting a location for the LaserWriter

12/640 PS that provides enough room to accommodate the increased height of the printer.

If you intend to keep the printer in its current location, make sure that adequate room will be available for opening the top cover, loading paper, and maintaining the printer. You will also need to temporarily move the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS from its current location to place the cassette base in its place. When moving the printer, be sure to place it on a strong, stable surface that can support its weight.

IMPORTANT If you purchased the optional duplex printing unit, follow the instructions outlined below. The procedure is the same, but the 500-sheet cassette and feeder is installed under the duplex printing unit.

1 Turn off and unplug the printer, and disconnect the network cables.

2 Unpack the 500-sheet cassette and feeder and remove any packing materials within the base and paper cassette.

108 Chapter 5

500-sheet cassette

3 Place the 500-sheet cassette and feeder where you want the LaserWriter 12/640 PS to be located.

Orient the 500-sheet cassette and feeder so that its paper cassette and the printer’s multipurpose tray and paper cassette will be on the same side when the printer is attached.

4 Lift the LaserWriter 12/640 PS, position it directly over the 500-sheet cassette and feeder, and gently lower the printer until it sits evenly on the cassette base.

Position the printer over these three posts.

Installing Options 109

5 Remove the cassettes from the printer and the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

6 Insert the four locking connectors into the slots located on the front and back of the printer and base.

110 Chapter 5

The locking connectors secure the printer to the feeder.

7 Insert the cassettes into the printer and the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

8 Turn on the printer.

9 Configure your printer software to use the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

Next you must configure the printer software to use the new paper option. For configuration instructions, see “Configuring Your Printer Software for New

Options,” later in this chapter.

For instructions on loading paper into the envelope cassette, see Chapter 9.

For information about printing options, m see Chapter 6 if you are using the Mac OS m see Chapter 7 if you are using Windows 3.1 or DOS m see Chapter 8 if you are using Windows 95

Removing the 500-sheet cassette and feeder

1 Remove the cassettes from the printer and the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

2 Remove the four locking connectors by pinching the top and bottom of the connectors.

The connectors are located on the front and back sides of the printer and the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

3 Gently lift the printer from the 500-sheet cassette and feeder and place it on a flat and stable surface.

4 Configure your printer software to remove the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

Installing Options 111

Installing the envelope cassette

IMPORTANT The LaserWriter 12/640 PS envelope cassette fits into the

500-sheet feeder. For instructions on installing the optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder, see “Installing the 500-Sheet Cassette and Feeder,” earlier in this chapter.

1 Unpack the envelope cassette and remove all packing materials.

2 Remove the 500-sheet cassette and insert the envelope cassette.

Envelope cassette 500-sheet feeder

3 Configure your printer software to use the envelope feeder.

For configuration instructions, see “Configuring Your Printer Software for

New Options,” later in this chapter.

For instructions for loading paper into the envelope cassette, see Chapter 9.

For information about printing options, m see Chapter 6 if you are using the Mac OS m see Chapter 7 if you are using Windows 3.1 or DOS m see Chapter 8 if you are using Windows 95

112 Chapter 5

Installing the face-up output tray

Follow these instructions to install the LaserWriter 12/640 PS face-up output tray. You can install the face-up tray onto the back of the printer or the duplex printing unit.

1 Unpack the face-up output tray and remove all packing materials.

2 Line up the tabs on the bottom edge of the face-up output tray with the holes in the back of the printer.

3 Gently push down on the face-up output tray to insert the tabs into their receiving slots.

4 Slide out the tray until it locks into place.

Installing Options 113

114 Chapter 5

5 Extend the tray.

Installing the face-up output tray on the optional duplex printing unit

1 Line up the tabs on the bottom edge of the face-up output tray with the holes in the back of the duplex printing unit.

2 Gently push down on the face-up output tray to insert the tabs into their receiving slots.

3 Slide out the tray until it locks into place.

4 Extend the tray.

Installing Options 115

Removing the face-up output tray

1 Slide in the tray.

2 Gently pull up on the face-up output tray (to remove the tabs from their receiving slots) and then out.

Increasing the printer RAM

You can increase the memory size of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS. You can install up to 64 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM) in the printer to provide faster performance on complex documents, documents containing many fonts, and duplex printing. You can also enable the printer’s

PhotoGrade feature, which provides enhanced printing of graphics, by increasing the printer’s memory to 12 MB of RAM or more.

Adding RAM allows more fonts to be downloaded to the printer at one time; provides more space to store the calculations needed for large or complex images; increases the space available for font caching, or maintaining recently used fonts in memory for faster access the next time they are needed; and enables duplex printing.

IMPORTANT The instructions provided here explain how to install added memory in your printer yourself. If you wish, you can also contact an Appleauthorized dealer to install more memory for a service fee.

You can purchase additional RAM for the LaserWriter 12/640 PS in units of 4, 8, 16, and 32 MB. You can purchase 4 MB RAM expansion kits from

Apple-authorized dealers. You can also purchase RAM expansion kits from many electronics and computer outlets. For information about the RAM specifications required to expand your printer’s memory, see Appendix D.

IMPORTANT The RAM used in the LaserWriter 12/640 PS is not the same type of RAM used in earlier LaserWriter II printers. The two are not interchangeable.

116 Chapter 5

WARNING Refrain from handling the memory until you have put on a grounding wrist strap. Handling the memory without wearing a grounding strap may allow static electricity to be discharged into the memory and damage it. If your memory kit didn’t come with a grounding wrist strap, you can purchase one from a computer dealer.

Installing RAM

Your printer comes with 4 MB of RAM installed in Bank A/B.

The table below lists RAM configurations you can use.

20 MB

24 MB

32 MB

32 MB

36 MB

40 MB

48 MB

48 MB

64 MB

Amount of memory (megabytes)

4 MB

8 MB

8 MB

12 MB

12 MB

16 MB

16 MB

4 MB

8 MB

16 MB

0 MB

4 MB

8 MB

16 MB

32 MB

32 MB

4 MB

8 MB

8 MB

0 MB

Bank C/D (left slot)

0 MB

4 MB

0 MB

16 MB

16 MB

16 MB

32 MB

32 MB

32 MB

32 MB

16 MB

32 MB

Bank A/B (right slot)

4 MB

4 MB

8 MB

8 MB

4 MB

8 MB

16 MB

Installing Options 117

IMPORTANT Other possible configurations may produce diagnostic errors when the printer starts up or may produce unexpected results.

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB

Removing the printer’s side cover

WARNING Make sure the printer is turned off.

1 If necessary, turn the printer so that the left side is accessible.

2 Locate the two Phillips screws on the back of the printer.

3 Unscrew and remove the screws. Put them in a safe place.

118 Chapter 5

Remove both of the Phillips screws.

4 Open the top cover of the printer.

5 Remove the paper cassette.

6 Grasp the top and front parts of the side cover and pry gently to free the tabs from their receiving slots.

Lift the edges of the side cover up and out, then pull the cover off.

7 Pull the side cover off.

Installing Options 119

120 Chapter 5

Putting on the grounding strap

IMPORTANT Be sure to put on the grounding wrist strap before handling the

SIMM or any internal printer parts. The strap grounds you to the printer, preventing any static discharge that might harm the SIMM or printer. Wearing the strap cannot harm you. Follow these steps:

1 Wrap the end of the strap that does not have copper foil on it around your wrist.

The strap’s light adhesive coating keeps it attached to your wrist, while allowing for easy removal.

2 Remove the backing from the piece of copper foil at the other end of the strap.

3 Attach the copper-foil end of the strap to the metal lip on the inside of the printer by pressing the adhesive backing against the metal.

Copper-foil end

Metal lip

Installing SIMMs

The printer’s circuit board has two SIMM slots, marked BANK C/D (on the left) and BANK A/B (on the right), for installing additional memory. RAM is provided on SIMMs (Single Inline Memory Modules) that you insert into the slots.

Bank C/D

Bank A/B

Depending on the amount of memory you’re installing, you may need to install one or two SIMMs, and perhaps remove a SIMM from a slot in order to insert one that has more memory. For example, when installing 20 MB of

RAM, you must remove the 4 MB SIMM from bank A/B and reinstall it in bank C/D.

When removing SIMMs, always begin by removing the SIMM in bank A/B first. Removing a SIMM in the C/D slot first can be difficult because of the proximity of the slots.

When installing SIMMs, always begin by installing the SIMM in bank C/D first. Installing a SIMM in the A/B slot first can make installing a second

SIMM in bank C/D difficult because of the proximity of the slots.

Installing Options 121

122 Chapter 5

1 Insert the SIMM into the connector and press the SIMM down at an angle until the retaining clips on each end of the connector snap and fasten the SIMM in place.

Hold the SIMM vertically over the slot, aligning the connectors and notches with the circuit board’s connector. Notice that one edge of the SIMM has a distinctive notch that you can use to judge the orientation and alignment of the SIMM with the connector. This notch, on the bottom edge of the SIMM, should be down as you install the SIMM.

Insert the card straight in.

Gently angle the card back.

Snap the card into the retaining clips.

Notch

WARNING When installing a SIMM, avoid touching the printer’s circuit board with hands or tools to avoid damaging or scratching the printed circuits.

To remove a SIMM, carefully spread the retaining clips at both ends of the installed SIMM, then rotate the SIMM forward until it can be pulled free of the slot.

2 Repeat step 1 to install the second SIMM if necessary.

You’ve now installed the expanded memory. You need only replace the side cover to complete the installation.

3 Remove and discard the grounding wrist strap.

Replacing the side cover

After installing the memory, you then replace the side cover on the printer and fasten it with the Phillips screws that you removed earlier.

To replace the cover on the printer, follow these steps.

1 Line up the front edge of the side cover with the front edge of the printer.

2 Gently press the cover into the printer until the tabs snap into their receiving slots.

Place the cover back on the printer and press firmly until it snaps into place.

Check the Phillips screw holes on the back of the printer. The holes should be unobstructed. (You shouldn’t replace the Phillips screws until the side cover is properly positioned.)

If the hole is obstructed, remove the side cover and try again. It may take a few tries.

Installing Options 123

3 With the back cover properly positioned, replace the Phillips screws. Do not overtighten the screws.

4 Next, configure the printer software to use the additional memory.

For configuration instructions, see “Configuring Your Printer Software for

New Options,” next.

If you want to check that you have properly installed the additional printer memory, turn the printer back on and check the startup page. The amount of printer memory should be listed there.

The printer does self-diagnostic tests each time it is turned on. During this testing, the printer verifies the amount of memory installed. If the diagnostics test determines that the installation is not correct, the Paper Out and the

Paper Jam lights will flash alternately. Check that you have installed the

SIMMs properly in the correct slots. If this does not resolve the problem, contact an Apple-authorized dealer.

Configuring your printer software for new options

After installing more memory or paper options, the administrator or the user needs to update the printer software on each computer connected to the network. You can reconfigure the printer software using the Chooser on

Mac OS–based computers or the Windows Setup dialog box on

Windows-based computers.

124 Chapter 5

Configuring the printer from a Mac OS–based computer

From the desktop printer icon

1 Select the desktop printer icon for the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer.

2 Choose Change Setup from the Printing menu.

The LaserWriter Setup dialog box appears.

3 Click Auto Setup.

4 Click OK.

From the Chooser

If no desktop printer icon exists for the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer, you must configure your printer using the Chooser.

1 Choose the Chooser from the Apple (

K

) menu.

The Chooser dialog box appears.

2 Click the LaserWriter 8 icon.

3 Click a zone name to select the zone of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS, if your network has zones. If your network doesn’t have zones, skip to step 4.

Installing Options 125

4 Double-click the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer name.

The printer software automatically checks the printer’s options and selects the correct settings.

5 Close the Chooser.

Designating the 500-sheet cassette and feeder as the preferred paper source

After installing a 500-sheet feeder, you can specify that the printer use the

500-sheet feeder as the preferred paper source. When you choose Auto Select as the paper source in the Mac OS Print dialog box, the printer will draw paper from the 500-sheet feeder if it holds the appropriate size paper. To designate the 500-sheet feeder as the preferred source, you must manually configure the printer software.

1 Select the desktop printer icon for the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer.

2 Choose Change Setup from the Printing menu.

The LaserWriter Setup dialog box appears.

126 Chapter 5

3 Click Auto Setup.

4 Select “Cassette (Optional)” from the Change pop-up menu.

5 Select “Installed and Preferred” from the To pop-up menu.

6 Click OK.

Configuring the printer from a Windows 3.1–based computer

1 From the Program Manager, double-click the Print Manager icon to display the

Print Manager.

2 Select the LaserWriter12/640 PS printer from the list of Printers.

3 Choose the Setup command from the Options menu to display the Setup dialog box for your printer.

The Setup dialog box contains buttons that display other dialog boxes containing additional printer settings.

4 Click the Features button.

The Features dialog box appears.

5 Set controls in this dialog box to set up the optional features that you have installed on your LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

6 Click OK to close the Features dialog box.

7 Click OK to close the Setup dialog box.

Configuring the printer from a Windows 95–based computer

1 From the Task-Bar, click Start and then select Printers from Settings.

2 Click the printer icon for the printer on which you want to update the software.

3 Choose Properties from the File menu.

4 Click the Device Options panel.

5 Set controls in the panel for the optional features that you have installed on your

LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

6 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

Installing Options 127

Printing

6

Mac OS Users

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS comes with software and fonts for use with

Mac OS–based computers. This chapter describes the standard printing and page setup options of the LaserWriter 8 printer driver and the desktop printer software supplied with your printer.

On a Mac OS–based computer, printing functions are controlled through the

Page Setup and Print dialog boxes, which are accessed through the File menu.

Most Mac OS application programs use a version of the standard Page Setup and Print dialog boxes, although the exact options presented vary among programs. (See the manuals that came with your program for details about specific options.)

The default settings the printer uses for all documents can be changed with the Apple Printer Utility. For more information about the Apple Printer

Utility, see Appendix A.

129

130

Click here to see a list of the currently selected dimensions.

(To return to the picture, click again.)

Selecting page setup options

The Page Setup dialog box allows you to specify certain aspects of your document, such as its page size, format, and orientation, as well as the settings for several print effects. You can change these settings for every document you create. It’s recommended that you set your page setup options when you first create a document. Then, as you view and format the document it will closely resemble its final printed form.

1 Choose Page Setup from the File menu.

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

2 Select the page setup options you want.

To see a dialog box that lets you select enhancements to the printed image, choose

PostScript Options from this pop-up menu.

Use this pop-up menu to identify the printer you want to use.

Use this pop-up menu to identify the paper size you are using.

When the selections are set the way you want, click OK.

This picture illustrates your choice of paper and orientation, and it reflects changes as you make them.

m Select US Letter Small or US Legal Small to prevent pagination differences when printing to different printers. These paper sizes have the same physical size as US Letter and US Legal, but have larger margins.

3 To print using special effects, choose PostScript Options from the Page Setup pop-up menu. (If you don’t want to choose print options, skip to step 4.)

The PostScript Options dialog box appears.

m Select Flip Horizontal to flip the page image horizontally.

m Select Flip Vertical to flip the page image vertically.

m Select Invert Image to print a black-and-white reversed image.

m Select Substitute Fonts to substitute the fonts Helvetica, Times, and Courier for the Mac OS screen fonts Geneva, New York, and Monaco, respectively.

The substitution occurs even if TrueType outline fonts are available for

Geneva, New York, and Monaco. Text sizes in the printed document are scaled to compensate for size differences between the corresponding families of screen and printer fonts.

m Select Smooth Text to smooth edges of letters when your printer is printing fonts as bitmapped fonts.

m Select Smooth Graphics to smooth ragged edges of lines in bitmapped graphics.

m Select Precision Bitmap Alignment to make printed bitmapped graphics more precisely match the screen image.

m Select Unlimited Downloadable Fonts in a Document to print the document using as many downloadable fonts as you need. The fonts will be sent to the printer, used, and then removed from the printer’s memory.

The document will be printed more slowly.

Mac OS Users 131

132 Chapter 6

4 Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

You can make the printer’s current page setup settings the default software settings by holding down the Option key and clicking OK. (Some programs may not support this method of setting defaults.)

Printing documents

When you are printing from a Mac OS–based computer, most application programs display a Print dialog box, in which you specify print options such as the number of copies you want printed, whether to print all or part of a document, and which paper tray or cassette will be the paper source.

Some application programs also add more choices to the Print dialog box.

For information about such options, refer to the documentation that came with the program.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Select the options you want.

To define a single paper source, click

“All pages from.”

Then choose a paper source from the pop-up menu.

To print the document on paper, select

Printer. To save it as a

PostScript or EPS file, choose File.

To print a transparency or sheet of paper that you feed by hand, select

Manual Feed as the paper source.

To use your settings as the default settings, click

Save Settings.

To see dialog boxes that let you select more options, choose a setting from the Settings pop-up menu.

To define multiple paper sources, click

“First page from.”

Then choose one paper source from each of the pop-up menus.

IMPORTANT The names that appear in the paper source menus vary according to the paper sources of your printer and paper sizes you choose in the Page

Setup dialog box.

m To have the printer automatically select the paper tray that holds the size of paper chosen for the document, choose Auto Select as the paper source.

m You can print to other printers by selecting their name from the Printer pop-up menu. Only printers that have desktop printer icons created with

LaserWriter 8 are listed.

Mac OS Users 133

134 Chapter 6

3 When the selections are what you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu or click Print.

m To print a cover page, choose Cover Page from the Settings pop-up menu.

m To choose settings for printing grayscale images, choose Color Matching from the Settings pop-up menu.

m To turn on PhotoGrade or FinePrint, choose Imaging Options from the

Settings pop-up menu.

m To duplex print and set the number of pages per sheet, choose Layout from the Settings pop-up menu.

m To print to a file, choose File from the Destination pop-up menu and choose Save as File from the Settings pop-up menu.

m To set background printing, choose Background Printing from the Settings pop-up menu.

m To set the output paper path, choose Printer Options from the Settings pop-up menu.

m To set program-specific options (such as page order), choose the program’s name from the Settings pop-up menu.

Printing a cover page automatically

The LaserWriter 8 printing software can automatically print a cover page that provides information about the printed document, such as the document’s name and the date and time of printing. You can set the printer to print the cover page at the beginning or the end of the document.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Select the options you want.

3 Select Cover Page from the pop-up menu.

The cover page options dialog box appears.

To print the document without a cover page, click None.

For a cover page that appears at the front or at the end of the document, click

Before Document or

After Document.

To use your settings as the default settings, click Save Settings.

To define a different paper source for the cover page, choose one from the pop-up menu.

4 When the selections are as you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu, or click Print.

Printing grayscale documents

When you print a document containing shades of gray, you can choose to maximize either image quality or speed.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Choose Color Matching from the Settings pop-up menu.

The Color Matching dialog box appears.

Mac OS Users 135

3 Make the selection you want.

136 Chapter 6 m For the fastest printing, choose Black and White. (The image quality won’t be as good, especially if the original image is in color or grayscale.) m When printing grays, you will see the best results if you choose

Color/Grayscale.

m The ColorSync Color Matching and PostScript Color Matching options are used only when printing to a color printer. The LaserWriter 12/640 PS is not a color printer.

4 When the selections are what you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu or click Print.

Printing with FinePrint or PhotoGrade

FinePrint smoothes out lines and curves and enhances text and line graphics that would normally appear jagged. For documents that require the finest quality text that the printer can produce, turn FinePrint on.

PhotoGrade enhances the printed look of images, such as scanned or digital photographs, to produce added clarity, finer shading, and better contrast. For documents that require images to be printed with the best quality that the printer can produce, turn PhotoGrade on. For documents that contain both text and high-quality images, turn PhotoGrade on and FinePrint off.

Having both FinePrint and PhotoGrade on can affect how images print. For documents that have many images and require high-quality reproduction, you may want to turn FinePrint off. To determine the effect of printing using FinePrint and PhotoGrade, you can print portions of a document with FinePrint and PhotoGrade turned on or off to see the differences in printed output.

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

20 MB

24 MB

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Choose Imaging Options from the Settings pop-up menu.

The Imaging Options dialog box appears.

3 Make the selection you want.

Mac OS Users 137

138 Chapter 6

4 When the selections are what you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu or click Print.

Printing on both sides of the paper

With the optional duplex printing unit, you can print on both sides of the paper (often called duplex printing or two-sided printing). You can only duplex print from the paper cassettes.

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB

Note: You cannot duplex print from the multipurpose tray. You cannot print to the face-up output tray when duplex printing.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Choose Layout from the Settings pop-up menu.

The Layout dialog box appears.

3 Make the selections you want.

This picture illustrates your choice of pages per sheet and direction, and it reflects changes as you make them.

Use the “Pages per

Sheet” pop-up menu to choose 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet.

(The printer reduces or enlarges pages to fit the layout.)

To duplex print, select Print on

Both Sides and select the binding orientation.

m Binding determines how pages are printed when you are printing on both sides of the paper. If you want the binding orientation along the side of the paper (like in a book or magazine), click the left binding button. If you want the binding orientation along the bottom of the paper (such as in a calendar), click the right binding button.

4 When the selections are what you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu or click Print.

Printing to a file

You can save your document as a PostScript file or an EPS file.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Choose File from the Destination pop-up menu.

3 Choose PostScript Printer Options from the Settings pop-up menu.

The PostScript Printer Options dialog box appears.

Mac OS Users 139

4 Make the selections you want.

You can save the file as ASCII or Binary.

Binary files are typically smaller in size.

Font inclusion lets you print the font on any computer without relying on font substitution.

5 When the selections are what you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu or click Print.

Background printing and setting the print time

With background printing turned on, you can use your computer for other work while you’re printing. Once background printing is turned on, it is in effect whenever you print, until you turn it off. When you click Print in the

Print dialog box, a message appears for a moment to tell you the document is being prepared. Once the message disappears, you can continue other work.

Your computer may pause occasionally while it processes the document for printing.

When foreground printing is turned on, you must wait until the document has finished printing before you can use your computer for other work. However, your document may be sent to the printer faster when foreground printing is turned on.

You can also specify when your document should be printed in relationship to other documents that are also being printed.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

140 Chapter 6

2 Choose Background Printing from the Settings pop-up menu.

The Background Printing dialog box appears.

3 Make the selections you want.

4 When the selections are as you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu, or click Print.

Selecting the output tray

You can specify where the printed pages exit the printer. Use face-up output to reduce curl and wrinkles. This is useful for envelopes, transparencies, labels, and other heavy stock paper.

You can use face-up output with or without the optional face-up output tray.

However, the face-up output tray stacks the papers neatly in a tray instead of on the surface where the printer is located.

Note: You cannot direct the output to face-up when duplex printing. You cannot direct U.S. legal-size paper to the face-up output.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Choose Printer Options from the Settings pop-up menu.

The Printer Options dialog box appears.

Mac OS Users 141

3 Choose an option.

142 Chapter 6

4 When the selection is as you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu, or click Print.

Reporting errors

You can specify what happens when a PostScript error occurs or when the paper cassette runs out of paper. For PostScript errors, you can have the printer provide no reporting, provide a summary of the print error on your computer screen (when using foreground printing), or print a page reporting the error. When the printer is out of paper, you can have the printer use another cassette with the same paper size or display an alert message.

If you select “Switch to another cassette with same paper size,” the printer will get paper from its input trays in the following order: standard cassette, multipurpose tray, optional 500-cassette, optional envelope cassette.

IMPORTANT If you have the same size paper in your paper cassettes and multipurpose tray and have tray switching turned on, the printer may draw paper from any paper source that has the correct size paper (even if you select a specific paper source from the Print dialog box). If you want to print from a specific paper source only, do not select “Switch to another cassette with same paper size.”

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

The Print dialog box appears.

2 Choose Error Handling from the Settings pop-up menu.

The Error Handling dialog box appears.

3 Make the selections you want.

4 When the selections are as you want, choose another setting from the Settings pop-up menu, or click Print.

Mac OS Users 143

Printing with a desktop printer

You can also print documents without leaving the Finder, using one of the two methods described here. These methods are particularly efficient when you have a number of documents from the same application that you want to print at once.

m Drag the icons of the documents (from one application) to the desktop icon of the printer you want to use.

or m Select the icons of the documents you want to print and choose the Print command from the File menu. The documents will be printed on the default printer. (See “Switching Between Printers,” next.)

In either case, the computer will show you the Print dialog box so you can choose printing options. Make your choices, then click the Print button.

After a few moments, the document starts to print. If background printing is turned on, you can continue working while the document is printing. You can also monitor and control the documents that are waiting to print. (See

“Monitoring Printing,” later in this chapter.)

144 Chapter 6

Switching between printers

If you have more than one printer available, you can select which you want to use. The printer you select is called the default printer. All your documents will be printed on the default printer until you select a new one.

A bold outline indicates that this is the default printer, the printer you will use until you indicate otherwise.

A plain outline indicates that this is not the default printer.

To change the default printer, use one of these four methods, as described in the next sections.

m Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon, and it will automatically become the default printer.

m Select the desktop printer icon and use the Printing menu to set the printer as the default.

m Select a new printer using the Chooser.

m Select a new printer using the Printer icon in the desktop menu.

Note: Switching between printers may change how much information you can fit on a page. It’s best to choose a printer before you spend much time formatting the document.

Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon

Drag the icon of any document you want to print to the icon of the printer you want to use. (See “Printing With a Desktop Printer,” earlier in this chapter.)

Printing PostScript files as text

To print a PostScript file as text, hold down the Option key and drag the document to the icon of the printer you want to use.

Mac OS Users 145

146 Chapter 6

Select the printer using its desktop printer icon

If you already have a desktop printer icon for the printer you want to use, follow these steps to select the printer without immediately printing anything on it:

1 Click the icon of the desktop printer you want to use.

A Printing menu appears on the menu bar at the top of the screen.

2 Choose the Set Default Printer command from the Printing menu.

Until you choose another printer, the Print command will send your documents to this printer.

Shortcut: Select a desktop printer and press x-L to make that printer the default printer.

Select a new printer using the Chooser

If you don’t have a desktop printer icon for the printer you want to use, you must select the printer using the Chooser. The Chooser will then create a desktop printer icon for the printer that you select.

1 Select the Chooser from the Apple (

K

) menu.

2 Select the printer that you want.

3 Click the Create button to set up the printer.

4 Close the Chooser by clicking the close box in the upper-left corner.

When you click Create, the Chooser creates a desktop printer icon for the printer you selected.

Select a new printer from the Printer icon in the desktop menu

A printer icon is created next to the Help menu when you install the

LaserWriter software. Only printers that have desktop icons associated with them are listed in the Printer menu. Selecting a printer from this menu makes that printer the default printer.

Working with desktop printer icons

To create a desktop printer, select the printer using the Chooser. After you click Create, the icon will appear on your desktop. See “Select a New Printer

Using the Chooser” under “Switching Between Printers,” the previous section in this chapter.

You may also do the following with desktop printer icons: m

Throw away the icon.

Drag the icon to the Trash. You can’t throw away a desktop printer icon while the printer is printing a document. (You can create another desktop printer icon for that printer whenever you like.)

Note: You must always have at least one printer icon on your desktop. If you throw away the last icon, it will immediately be created again.

m

Rename the icon.

Rename the icon as you would any other Finder icon.

Click the name to highlight it, then type the new name. This changes the name of the icon, not the name of the printer.

m

Move the icon.

You may drag the icon anywhere you like. The icon can remain on the desktop or be placed in a folder.

m

Create an alias for the icon.

You may create an alias for the icon as you would any Finder icon, by selecting the icon and choosing the Make Alias command from the File menu. The alias may be moved anywhere on or off the desktop.

Determining the status of a printer by looking at its icon

You can tell the status of a printer by looking at its desktop icon:

Stopped icon indicates you have stopped the print queue.

Plain icon indicates a printer that is not currently chosen for printing.

Default icon indicates the printer you have currently chosen to print on.

Printing icon indicates a document is printing on this printer.

Error icon indicates there is an error on this printer. Double-click the icon to see a message.

Disabled icon indicates the desktop printing extension is turned off or the LaserWriter extension is no longer in the Extensions folder.

Mac OS Users 147

Monitoring printing

If you are using background printing, you can use the desktop printer features to monitor and control the documents that are waiting to print.

1 Double-click the desktop printer icon you’re interested in.

Select a document that’s on hold and click the

Resume Job button to resume printing.

Select a document and click the Hold Job button to put a print request on hold.

A window opens listing the documents that are printing or waiting to print:

Select a document and click the Set Print

Time button to specify when the document should be printed.

Select a document and click the

Remove button to cancel the print request.

Document currently printing

Column titles (click to sort)

Documents waiting to print

Watching the status messages can be helpful when troubleshooting printing problems. When more than one job is waiting to be printed, a list of print jobs appears in the waiting list, showing the order in which they will be printed (when sorted by print time).

2 Choose what you’d like to do.

m

To cancel a print request, select it by clicking its title or icon and click the

Remove button. You can only select the currently printing document by clicking its title. (You can select more than one item at a time by holding down the Shift key while clicking.) You can also drag the icon for the print request to the Trash. Note that these methods delete only the print request

(also referred to as a spool file), not the document itself.

148 Chapter 6

m

To put a print request on hold, select it and click the Hold button. The print request will stay on hold until you select it again and click the Resume button. You can also put the document that’s currently printing on hold by dragging it to the list of documents waiting to print (lower part of the window).

m

To indicate that a print request is urgent, select it and click the Set Print Time button. In the dialog box that opens, click Urgent. This moves the print request to the top of your list.

m

To indicate that a print request should not print until a future time, select it and click the Set Print Time button. In the dialog box that opens, click At Time, then set the time you want.

m

To change the order of the items waiting to print, move their place in the list by dragging their titles up or down in the list.

m

To sort the list of documents waiting to print, click the title of the column you want to sort by. For example, to sort by the name of the document, click

“Document Name.” (You can also sort by choosing the commands in the

View menu.) The column title you sorted by is underlined. Sorting the items does not change the order in which they will print. To see that order, sort by Print Time.

m

To temporarily stop all documents from printing on this printer, choose Stop Print

Queue from the Printing menu in the Finder menu bar. To resume using the printer, choose Start Print Queue from the Printing menu.

Shortcut: Pressing the Option-Shift keys changes the Hold Job and Resume

Job buttons to Stop Queue and Start Queue.

Shortcut: The Printing menu for starting and stopping the print queue is available without opening the window for the printer, so long as the printer’s icon is selected on the desktop.

m

To move a print request from one printer to another printer of the same type (for example, from a LaserWriter 12/640 PS to a LaserWriter 4/600 PS), drag the icon for the print request to the icon of the printer where you want to move it. You can only move a print request from a LaserWriter 12/640 PS to another PostScript printer. The printing software won’t let you move a print request to an incompatible printer. For example, you can’t move a request from a LaserWriter printer to a StyleWriter printer.

Mac OS Users 149

m

To get information about the printer, choose Get Printer Info from the Printing menu. Status, configuration, and font information is displayed.

m

To change the printer setup (for example, when you add or remove printer options, such as the duplex printing unit), choose Change Setup from the

Printing menu.

m

To change the manual feed alerts, choose Show Manual Feed Alert from the

Printing menu. A checkmark by this command means that manual feed alert message will appear.

Turning off or removing the desktop printing software

You can remove an individual desktop printer icon by dragging it into the trash. If you have only one desktop printer, you can’t get rid of the icon by dragging it to the Trash. (The icon will reappear if you do.)

Turning off the Desktop PrintMonitor

If you don’t want to use desktop printers, you can turn off the Desktop

PrintMonitor using the Extensions Manager (available on Mac OS versions

7.5 or later).

To turn off the Desktop PrintMonitor:

1 Open the Extensions Manager control panel in the Control Panels folder.

2 Click to deselect (uncheck) Desktop PrintMonitor, Desktop Printer Menu, Desktop Printer

Spooler, and Desktop Printer Extension in the panel.

3 Click the close box to close the control panel.

4 Restart your computer.

150 Chapter 6

Removing the desktop printing software

The desktop printing software uses both the Desktop PrintMonitor and the

PrintMonitor software. The Desktop PrintMonitor requires 200–400K bytes more free system memory in addition to the memory required by the

PrintMonitor. If you don’t want to use the desktop printing software, you can remove it.

To remove desktop printing software:

1 Restart your computer with the extensions off by holding down the Shift key and choosing Restart from the Special menu. Hold the Shift key down until the message

“Extensions off” appears or until your normal desktop appears.

2 Drag the following files from the Extensions folder to the Trash: m Desktop PrintMonitor m Desktop Printer Menu m Desktop Printer Spooler m Desktop Printer Extension

3 If you have Control Strip installed on your system, drag the Printer Selector file to the

Trash.

4 Restart your computer.

Making changes to the printer setup

If you turn off desktop printing and add or remove printer options, you must set up the printer again using the Chooser.

1 Choose the Chooser from the Apple (

K

) menu.

The Chooser window appears.

2 Click the LaserWriter 8 icon (in the left half of the Chooser).

If you don’t see the LaserWriter 8 icon, scroll through the window.

3 Click the name of the network zone in which your printer is located, if your printer is connected to a network with zones.

4 Click the name of your LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

Mac OS Users 151

5 Click Setup.

The Setup dialog box appears.

6 Select the option that you want.

m Click Auto Setup to let the Chooser identify the type of printer and automatically set up the printer software.

m Click Select PPD to choose a PostScript Printer Description file for the printer.

m Click Printer Info to view printer information such as its name, available memory, and so on.

m Click Configure to setup options that you’ve added to the printer.

7 Click OK.

Using the Apple Printer Utility

The Apple Printer Utility program supplied with the printer software allows the printer administrator to control various aspects of how the LaserWriter

12/640 PS works. For information about using the Apple Printer Utility, see

Appendix A.

152 Chapter 6

7

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS comes with software for IBM PC or compatible computers using Windows 3.1 and Windows 95. This chapter describes how to use the PostScript Printer Driver for Windows 3.1 and how to print from DOS.

If you are using Windows 95, see Chapter 8.

153

Printing from Windows applications

After you have connected the printer to your computer and installed and set up the printer software, you’re ready to start printing. This section explains the basic steps required to print a document, though the details can vary from one program to another. To find out more about printing from your programs, read the documentation that came with them. If you have Windows NT, print using the TCP/IP protocol or using AppleTalk protocol. See your Windows

NT manual for information on configuring.

To print a document from a Windows program, the program must be open and the document window must be active.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

In most cases a Print dialog box appears in which you can select options, including the number of copies and the pages to print. Depending on your program, the Print dialog box may offer other options.

2 In the dialog box that appears, select the options you want and click Print.

Selecting page setup options

The Windows Page Setup dialog box allows you to specify certain aspects of your document, such as its page size, input paper tray source, and orientation.

You can change these settings for every document you create. It’s recommended that you set your page setup options when you first create a document. Then, as you view and format the document it will closely resemble its final printed form.

1 Choose Page Setup (sometimes called Print Setup) from the File menu.

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

2 Select the page setup options you want.

154 Chapter 7

Setting printer driver options

You can change the PostScript Printer Driver default options. For example, you can change the preset paper orientation to Portrait or Landscape.

You set printer options in the printer driver Setup dialog box, which you can open in three ways, as explained in the sections that follow: m from the Control Panel m from your application m from the Print Manager

Note: When changing options to print a specific document, it’s preferable to change the options from within the application. Settings you change from within an application will affect that document only and not all documents printed afterward. Settings you change in an application’s Print dialog box override print options you set in the Setup dialog box.

Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Control Panel

1 From the Program Manager, double-click the Control Panel icon to display the

Control Panel.

2 Double-click the Printers icon to display the Printers dialog box.

3 Select the printer you want to set up from the Installed Printers list.

4 Choose Setup to display the Setup dialog box for the printer.

You can also use the Printers dialog box to select a default printer, to switch the Print Manager on and off, and to connect your printer to a different port.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 155

156 Chapter 7

Opening the printer Setup dialog box from your application

Most applications have a Print Setup command in their File menus.

1 Choose the Print Setup command from the File menu.

This command usually displays the Print Setup dialog box.

2 If you are using more than one printer, select the printer you want to set up.

3 Click the Options (or Setup) button to display the Setup dialog box.

Note: The names of the commands and buttons used to display the printer

Setup dialog box vary from program to program. See your program’s documentation for the precise command and button names it uses.

Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Print Manager

1 From the Program Manager, double-click the Print Manager icon to display the

Print Manager.

2 Select the printer you want to set up from the list of Printers.

3 Choose the Setup or Printer Setup command from the Options menu.

4 Select the printer you want to set up and click Setup.

Selecting printer options in the Setup dialog box

You can change the most commonly used printer settings from the Setup dialog box. (The tabs in the dialog box also give you access to additional printer settings. For information about these settings, see “Additional

Printer Options,” next.) The previous sections explain how to open the

Setup dialog box.

The Paper tab dialog box is displayed first.

m

Output Format Selects either PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript. Use

PostScript for normal printing. Use Encapsulated PostScript to create a file that can be placed in a document of a program that accepts encapsulated

PostScript images.

m

Paper Source Selects which paper cassette or multipurpose tray to use as the paper source.

m

Paper Size Specifies the paper size. Select the size that matches the paper in the current paper source.

m

Orientation Selects the orientation of the printed page. You can select

Portrait (tall), Landscape (wide), or Rotated Landscape (which prints text and images in landscape orientation, but reverses the top and bottom of the page, most useful when you’re printing with three-hole punched paper).

m

Scaling Shrinks or enlarges the print image by a percentage you specify.

You can scale the image from 10 percent to 400 percent.

m

Copies Specifies the number of copies of each document page to print.

m

Watermarks Specifies which watermark to use.

m

Layout Specifies the number of pages to print on each sheet of paper.

m

Preview Screen Shows changes you make in the driver settings.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 157

Additional printer options

In addition to the Paper tab, other tabs display settings for: m PostScript m Fonts m Features m Job control m Watermark

PostScript

Click the PostScript tab to display the PostScript tab dialog box, which controls color printing, the communication protocol, and PostScript Level 2 features.

158 Chapter 7 m

Use PostScript Level 2 Features Tells the driver to use PostScript Level 2 features when printing documents. Use the Level 2 features to speed printing.

m

Send Data in Binary Tells the driver to send data to the printer in a binary format. Sending data in binary format may improve the printer’s performance when printing images or documents containing many downloadable fonts. The LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer can receive data in either ASCII or binary format.

m

Send Full Color Data Tells the driver to print colors on a color printer. Usually it is best to select this option even when printing to a non-color printer.

Colors print in finer shades of gray.

m

Match Colors Across Printers Tells the driver to save color-matching information with the data for use later when the document is saved to a file for printing on a different PostScript Level 2 printer.

m

Job Timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will spend trying to print a document before canceling the print job. A value of zero means that the job is never canceled.

m

Wait Timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will wait for Windows to send data before canceling the print job. A value of zero means that the job is never canceled.

m

Margins Changes the way the printer driver reports the printable area to the applications you use. The Default option tells the driver to report the printable area accurately to the applications. The None option tells the driver to report the dimensions of the paper as the printable area. m

Protocol Options Tells the printer driver whether to begin and end print jobs with Ctrl-D. Default means it will begin and end jobs with a Ctrl-D, and

None means it won’t. If the printer is connected to your computer or network by its parallel port, click Default; if it’s connected by its Ethernet port, click None.

m

PostScript Performance Tells the driver to build PostScript document descriptions that print as fast as possible when Optimize for Speed is selected. Such document descriptions might not print successfully on printers with limited memory. Select “Optimize for Portability” to tell the driver to build PostScript document descriptions that print successfully on many different printers.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 159

Fonts

Click the Fonts tab to display the Fonts tab dialog box. Parameters in this dialog box control the way the driver prints TrueType fonts used in your documents. The driver can download available TrueType fonts as TrueType fonts (Type 42), substitute available PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts, or automatically create PostScript versions of TrueType fonts and download them to the printer when you print.

160 Chapter 7 m

Send TrueType Fonts to This Printer as Tells the driver what kind of PostScript fonts to create for TrueType fonts. Select one of these options: m Type 1 to synthesize outline PostScript fonts.

m Type 3 to synthesize bitmapped PostScript fonts.

m Type 42 to package TrueType fonts for the PostScript printer.

m Don’t Send to use TrueType fonts that are resident in the printer or are supplied by print-manager software. (No TrueType fonts are resident on the printer as it is shipped from the factory.)

m

Substitute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer When checked, tells the driver to substitute PostScript fonts available to the printer for

TrueType fonts. The driver uses the TrueType Substitutions table to determine which PostScript font to use for each TrueType font installed on your system. Substituting PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts speeds printing (especially when the PostScript fonts are resident in the printer).

m

TrueType Substitutions for All Printers Lists all the TrueType fonts installed on your system, and for each TrueType font, shows which PostScript font is substituted for a TrueType font. This table is used only when you select the

“Substitute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer” option.

m

For This TrueType Font Shows a list of all the TrueType fonts installed on your system.

m

Substitute This Font Lets you select how font substitution is done. Shows a list of the PostScript fonts that are substituted for the TrueType fonts. Each list box lists all the PostScript fonts available to the printer. PostScript fonts available to the printer include all the fonts resident in the printer’s

ROM, as well as all the Type 1 fonts that you have downloaded to the printer’s RAM. Each list box also contains a Send As Type 1 option, which converts the TrueType font to a Type 1 font. The Use Defaults button restores the original PostScript font substitutions.

IMPORTANT For information about using Font Downloader, see “Downloading

Fonts,” later in this chapter.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 161

Features

Click the Features tab to display the Features tab dialog box, which lets you configure the printer software to use optional printing features that you install on the LaserWriter 12/640 PS. Use this dialog box to set up any optional features you may purchase, such as additional memory or the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

162 Chapter 7 m

PhotoGrade Turns PhotoGrade on or off. To use PhotoGrade, your printer must be upgraded to have at least 12 MB of RAM. PhotoGrade enhances the printed look of images, such as scanned or digital photographs, to produce added clarity, finer shading, and better contrast. For documents that require images to be printed with the best quality that the printer can produce, turn PhotoGrade on.

m

Sides Tells the printer to print on one side of the paper or on both.

m

Memory Configuration The amount of RAM installed in the printer.

m

Cassette Indicates whether you have installed the optional 500-sheet feeder.

m

Duplexer Indicates whether the optional duplex printing unit is installed.

m

Output Tray Tells the printer where to direct the media.

m

FinePrint Turns FinePrint on or off. FinePrint smoothes out lines and curves and enhances text and line graphics that would normally appear ragged. (However, to enhance the quality of images, you may want to turn

FinePrint off.) m

Tray Switch Turns tray switching on or off.

Job Control

Click the Job Control tab to display the Job Control tab dialog box, which controls such options as when the PostScript header and the PostScript error handler are sent to your printer.

m

Printer Mode Lets you set up the printer to receive data in ASCII or binary format.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 163

164 Chapter 7 m

PostScript Header The PostScript header contains instructions that a

PostScript printer needs to print documents created by the driver. If your printer is connected directly to your computer only, you can save time by choosing the Download button to send the PostScript header only once—when you switch on your printer. Download Each Job tells the driver to send the PostScript header with every document. Already

Downloaded tells the driver not to send the PostScript header with documents. Download tells the driver to send the header when you choose the Download button.

m

Error Handler Tells the driver to send a special PostScript error handler with every document you print. The error handler prints a page with a

PostScript error message when a document fails to print correctly. You can use this option as an aid in troubleshooting print job problems.

m

Font Control This advanced feature tells the driver not to download fonts when printing documents. Use this option if you know that the fonts you use in your documents are always available to the printer.

Watermark

Click the Watermark tab to display the Watermark tab dialog box, which contains options for defining, editing, and deleting watermarks.

m

Select a Watermark Lists available watermark definitions, which can be selected and edited or deleted.

m

Edit Displays the Edit Watermark dialog box, summarized below.

m

Add Displays the Add Watermark dialog box, which has the same features as the Edit Watermark dialog box, summarized below.

m

Delete Deletes the selected watermark definition.

m

Display area A bitmap area that displays a portrait image of what the page will look like when printed.

Edit Watermark

Choose the Edit button in the Watermark tab dialog box to display the Edit

Watermark dialog box.

m

Text Displays the text of the selected watermark for editing.

m

Font Lists all TrueType and ATM fonts and the 13 base PostScript fonts that either reside in the printer or can be downloaded to the printer.

m

Size Lets you specify a font size between 7 and 600 points.

m

Style Lets you specify a font style: Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic, as available.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 165

m

Print in Foreground Tells the printer to print the watermark in the foreground rather than in the background (the default). Choose this setting if you cannot see the watermark on the printed page.

m

Print Outline Only Tells the printer to print only the outline of the watermark.

Choose this setting if the watermark is covering graphic images in the document.

m

Angle Lets you specify the angle at which the watermark will display on the page.

m

Color Lets you specify red, green, and blue values for the color in which the watermark is printed. As an alternative, Choose Color brings up a

Color dialog box that lets you view and select a color for the watermark.

m

Automatically Center Watermark/Position Relative to Center Tells the driver how to position the watermark. Automatically Center Watermark centers the watermark on the page. Position Relative to Center lets you specify x and y coordinates for the watermark relative to the center.

Downloading fonts

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS uses downloadable PostScript fonts, which are a type of soft font. The PostScript printer driver automatically downloads any

Type 1 fonts from your computer’s hard disk to the printer’s memory as needed for each document that you print. You can also use the driver to manually download fonts to the printer’s memory when you don’t want to download fonts for each document. Manually downloading fonts can speed printing.

Note: The LaserWriter 12/640 PS has a set of built-in fonts that do not need to be downloaded. These fonts are listed in Appendix D.

Whether it is better to let Windows download fonts automatically or to manually download fonts yourself depends on the number and frequency with which fonts are used in a document and the size of your printer’s memory.

166 Chapter 7

Downloading a Type 1 font to a PostScript printer usually takes from 15 to 20 seconds. When a program prints a document containing a font that is not resident in your printer, Windows automatically downloads the font with the document. However, after the document prints, any fonts that have been downloaded with the document are cleared from the printer’s memory. This means that each time you print a document that contains fonts not resident in the printer, the fonts must be downloaded.

By contrast, when you manually download a Type 1 font with the Font

Downloader, the font remains in printer memory (RAM) until you switch off or restart the printer or when memory limitations are exceeded. Manually downloading frequently used fonts therefore reduces printing time because the fonts do not have to be sent to the printer each time they are used. Keep in mind, however, that fonts manually downloaded to RAM reduce the overall amount of memory available for printing and so may affect the printing of documents that do not contain the downloaded fonts.

In addition to downloading fonts, you can also use the Font Downloader to perform various printer management tasks, such as listing and removing downloaded fonts, manually downloading PostScript language files, clearing the printer font cache, and resynchronizing your printer with the

Windows driver.

See your network administrator for more information about performing these tasks on your network, or choose the Help button in the Font Downloader dialog box to see instructions for these tasks.

Downloading fonts manually to RAM

Fonts need to be downloaded only once. Users who want to use fonts that have already been downloaded should use the Job Control tab dialog box

(described earlier in this chapter) to turn on Do Not Download Fonts.

Otherwise, the fonts will be downloaded again, wasting time and system resources.

1 From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel.

2 Double-click the Printers icon.

The Printers dialog box appears.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 167

168 Chapter 7

3 If it is not already selected, select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS from the Installed

Printers list.

4 Click Setup.

The Setup dialog box appears.

Note: You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows programs. Check your program documentation to see if you can change your printer setup from within your program.

5 Click Fonts.

6 Click Font Downloader.

The Font Downloader dialog box appears.

7 Choose Memory from the Destination Memory list box.

8 Select the fonts you want to download from the Fonts Available list.

Fonts that are already present in the printer’s ROM do not need to be downloaded. For a list of these fonts, see Appendix D or print a list of font samples by choosing Print Font Samples in the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.

9 Click Download.

The Font Downloader informs you of its progress as it downloads fonts.

Note: While downloading, you can use other programs, but you can’t print.

10 After you are finished downloading fonts, click Exit.

You are returned to the Setup dialog box.

11 Click OK to close the Setup dialog box.

12 Click Close to close the Printers dialog box.

13 Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel.

You can confirm that the fonts were downloaded by printing a list of font samples with the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.

Printing to a PostScript file

As an alternative to printing your document on the printer, you can save a

PostScript language description of your document as a disk file. PostScript language descriptions of documents can be useful for m creating document archives m printing documents without using the program that created them (at a service bureau, for example) m diagnosing printing problems

You may also want to print an encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file. You can use

EPS files to export single pages from one program to another. EPS files can include any combination of text, graphics, and images, but they do not describe complete documents. For example, by saving an EPS file, you can insert a page of a document created with one program as an illustration in a document created by another program.

Note: PostScript files are normally ASCII text files that can be opened with any word-processing program. However, if you select the Send Data in Binary option in the PostScript Options dialog box, the PostScript files may include binary characters that make them unsuitable for use with a word processor.

You can use either of two methods to create PostScript files. If your program’s

Print dialog box has a Print to File checkbox, you can use this checkbox to create a PostScript file; this is the preferred method. Refer to your program documentation for information. If your program’s Print dialog box does not have a Print to File checkbox, however, you need to make temporary changes to your printer setup to create a PostScript file, as described next.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 169

170 Chapter 7

Using the driver to print to a PostScript file

Using the driver to print to a PostScript file is a three-step process. First, change your printer setup, then use your program to create the file, and finally reset your printer setup for normal printing.

Step 1: Changing your printer setup to print to a PostScript file

1 From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel and double-click the Printers icon.

The Printers dialog box appears.

2 If it is not already selected, select the name of the PostScript printer that you are using from the Installed Printers list.

3 Select Connect.

The Connect dialog box appears.

4 Select FILE from the Ports list box.

You may have to scroll through the list to find this selection.

5 Choose OK to close the Connect dialog box and return to the Printers dialog box.

6 Choose Setup.

The driver Setup dialog box appears.

7 After changing (or confirming) your printer settings, choose OK to close the dialog box.

Note: Choose settings in the PostScript Options dialog box that will produce a file that prints correctly on the destination printer. For example, select the

“Use PostScript Level 2 Features” option if you are sure that you will be printing the file only on Level 2 printers, such as the LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

If you plan to use a printer that does not support binary communication, disable the “Send Data in Binary” option. Selecting the “Optimize for

Portability” option creates PostScript files that print successfully from different programs on a wide variety of printers and imaging devices; it is recommended that you enable this option.

8 Choose Close to close the Printers dialog box.

9 Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel.

Your computer is now set up to create PostScript files when you choose the

Print command from a Windows program.

Step 2: Printing to a PostScript file

1 Start the program and open the document for which you want to create a PostScript file.

2 If necessary, select the Print Setup command from the File menu, change the settings as appropriate, and select OK.

3 Choose the Print command from the File menu.

Your program’s Print dialog box appears.

4 Choose OK.

A dialog box appears that asks you to name the file.

5 Enter a pathname and filename for the file.

If you don’t specify a pathname, the PostScript file is placed in your program’s default directory.

6 Choose OK.

The PostScript file is created, and you are returned to your program.

Step 3: Restoring your printer setup options

After creating PostScript files, you need to restore your original printer setup options before you can use your printer again.

1 From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel.

2 Double-click the Printers icon.

The Printers dialog box appears.

3 If it is not already selected, select the printer model from the Installed Printers list.

4 Choose Connect.

The Connect dialog box appears.

5 In the Ports list box, select the port to which your PostScript printer is connected.

Windows 3.1 and DOS Users 171

6 Choose OK.

The Connect dialog box closes, and you are returned to the Printers dialog box.

7 If you changed any printer settings to print a PostScript file, choose Setup to display the

Setup dialog box. Undo any changes you made and then choose OK.

The Printers dialog box appears.

8 Select OK to close the Printers dialog box.

9 Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel.

DOS notes

If you are using DOS programs, refer to the manual that came with your program and follow the instructions for using a PostScript printer. Most DOS programs are PostScript compatible.

Capturing a print queue for DOS printing

From DOS, you can use the NetWare CAPTURE command to map the parallel port to a print queue.

m

Log in to the NetWare network and enter the CAPTURE command, using the following syntax:

CAPTURE /q= queue_name local= lptnumber server= server_name job= new

Unless you specify otherwise, the command assumes that you are mapping the LPT1 port to a queue.

Using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows

The Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows program supplied with the printer software lets you control various aspects of how the printer works. For information about using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see

Appendix A.

172 Chapter 7

8

Windows 95 Users

This chapter provides information on using the LaserWriter 12/640 PS with computers running Windows 95.

If you are using Windows 3.1 or DOS, see Chapter 7.

173

Printing

On a PC, printing functions are controlled through the Page Setup and Print dialog boxes, which are accessed through the File menu.

Most Windows application programs use a version of the standard Page Setup and Print dialog boxes, although the exact options presented vary among programs. (See the manuals that came with your program for details about specific options.)

You can change default settings the printer uses for all documents with the

Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows. For more information about the

Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see Appendix A.

Selecting page setup options

The Windows Page Setup dialog box allows you to specify certain aspects of your document, such as its page size, format, and orientation as well as the settings for several print effects. You can change these settings for every document you create. It’s recommended that you set your page setup options when you first create a document. Then, as you view and format the document it will closely resemble its final printed form.

1 Choose Page Setup from the File menu.

The Page Setup dialog box appears.

2 Select the page setup options you want.

174 Chapter 8

Printing documents

When you are printing from Windows, most application programs display a

Print dialog box, in which you specify print options such as the number of copies you want printed, the layout, and which paper tray or cassette will be the paper source.

Some application programs also add more choices to the Print dialog box.

For information about such options, refer to the documentation that came with the program.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

2 In the dialog box that appears, make the selections you want.

Setting printing properties

You can change the default properties of the PostScript printer driver. For example, you can change the default paper orientation from Portrait to

Landscape.

You set printer options in the printer driver Properties dialog box, which you can open in three ways, as explained in the sections that follow: m from the Control Panel m from the Printers folder m from your application

Note: When changing options to print a specific document, it’s preferable to change the options from within the application. Settings you change from within an application will affect that document only and not all documents printed afterwards. Settings you change in an application’s Print dialog box override print options you set in the Properties dialog box.

Windows 95 Users 175

176 Chapter 8

Opening the printer Properties dialog box from the Control Panel

1 Click the Start icon on the Task-Bar, select Settings, and click Control Panel.

2 Double-click the Printers icon.

3 Select the printer you want to change and choose Properties from the File menu.

Opening the printer Properties dialog box from the Printer folder

1 Click the Start icon on the Task-Bar, select Settings, and click Printers.

2 Select the printer you want to change and choose Properties from the File menu.

Note: The Printers folder that appears is the same Printer folder that you see from the Control Panel.

Opening the printer Properties dialog box from your application

1 Choose Page Setup from the File menu.

2 Click Printer.

3 Select the printer you want to change and click Properties.

To change optional settings for a print job, click Properties, and then make the changes you want. If you save the changes, they usually persist from one file to the next. However, if you exit the application and reopen it later, any properties that you changed may be reset to their original default values.

You can also open the Properties dialog box from the Print dialog box.

Note: You will see fewer options when opening the Properties dialog box from your application. To see the complete set of print options, open the

Properties dialog box from the Printer folder.

1 Choose Print from the File menu.

2 Click Properties.

Selecting printer options in the Properties dialog box

You can change the most commonly used printer settings from the Properties dialog box. (The tabs in the dialog box also give you access to additional printer settings. For information about these settings, see “Additional Printer

Options,” next.) The previous sections explain how to open the Properties dialog box.

The Paper tab dialog box is displayed first.

m

Paper Size Specifies the paper size. Select the size that matches the paper in the current paper source.

m

Layout Specifies the number of pages to print on each sheet of paper.

m

Orientation Selects the orientation of the printed page. You can select

Portrait (tall), Landscape (wide), or Rotated Landscape (which prints text and images in landscape orientation, but reverses the top and bottom of the page; most useful when you’re printing with three-hole punched paper).

Windows 95 Users 177

178 Chapter 8 m

Paper Source Selects which paper cassette or multipurpose tray to use as the paper source.

m

Copies Specifies the number of copies of each document page to print.

m

Unprintable Area Displays the Unprintable Area dialog box, used to set the document margins.

m

More Options Displays the More Options dialog box, used to specify duplex printing settings.

Setting document margins

Choose the Unprintable Area button in the Paper tab dialog box to display the Unprintable Area dialog box, which lets you set the page margins.

m

Units Lets you define what unit of measurement to use when setting the document margins.

m

Top/Bottom/Left/Right Defines the unprintable area between the sides of the paper and the text or image of your document.

Setting duplex printing options

Choose the More Options button in the Paper tab dialog box to display the

More Paper Options dialog box, used to specify duplex print settings.

If your LaserWriter has been upgraded to a minimum of 12 MB of memory, and you’ve installed the optional duplex printing unit, you can duplex print.

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB m

Printing on both sides Lets you define how to duplex print. Select None to print only on one side. Select “Flip on long edge” if you want the binding orientation along the long edge of the paper (such as in a book or magazine). Select “Flip on short edge” if you want the binding orientation along the short edge of the paper (such as in a calendar).

m

Output bin Selects which tray to use as the output.

Windows 95 Users 179

180 Chapter 8

Additional printer options

In addition to the Paper tab, other tabs display settings for: m Graphics m Device Options m PostScript m Watermarks m Fonts m General m Details m Sharing

Graphics

Click the Graphics tab to display the Graphics tab dialog box, which controls resolution and special printing features.

m

Resolution Lets you specify the printer’s resolution.

m

Halftoning Lets you specify new frequency and angle values to use for halftone screens or use the printer’s default values.

m

Special Lets you define special printing features. Select Print as Negative

Image to print a black-and-white reversed image. Select Print as Mirror

Image to flip the page image vertically.

m

Scaling Shrinks or enlarges the print image by a percentage you specify.

You can scale the image from 10 percent to 400 percent.

Device Options

Click the Device Options tab to display the Device Options dialog box, which lets you configure the printer software to use optional printing features that you install on the LaserWriter 12/640 PS. Use this dialog box to set up any optional features you may purchase, such as additional memory or the 500sheet cassette and feeder.

FinePrint provides smoother, less jagged printing of text characters. You can set the printer’s default setting for the FinePrint feature to on or off. Users can change this setting in the Print Options dialog box. To print high-quality images, turn off FinePrint.

PhotoGrade enhances the look of printed images, such as scanned photographs, by providing more shades of gray and better printed clarity and contrast. If your LaserWriter has been upgraded to a minimum of 12 MB of memory, you can use PhotoGrade. You can set the printer’s default to have

PhotoGrade turned on and off.

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB

Windows 95 Users 181

When the LaserWriter 12/640 PS runs out of paper in one tray, it can automatically switch and use paper in another paper cassette or the multipurpose tray. By using automatic tray switching between the 250-sheet paper cassette and the 80-sheet multipurpose tray, you can print 330 sheets without reloading paper. If you have the optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder, and it contains the same size paper, automatic tray switching includes it as a paper source. Combining all three paper sources lets you print up to

830 sheets without reloading paper.

182 Chapter 8 m

Available printer memory Lets you specify the amount of available printer memory.

m

PhotoGrade Turns PhotoGrade on or off. To use PhotoGrade, your printer must be upgraded to have at least 12 MB of RAM. PhotoGrade enhances the printed look of images, such as scanned or digital photographs, to produce added clarity, finer shading, and better contrast. For documents that require images to be printed with the best quality that the printer can produce, turn PhotoGrade on.

m

FinePrint Turns FinePrint on or off. FinePrint smoothes out lines and curves and enhances text and line graphics that would normally appear ragged. (However, to enhance the quality of images, you may want to turn

FinePrint off.) m

Tray Switch Turns tray switching on or off.

The following options appear only if you open the Properties dialog box through the Printer folder: m

Installable options Lists the available options and their current state. For memory configuration, the amount of memory in the printer is displayed.

For all others, the values could be one of: Not Installed, Installed, or

Installed and Preferred.

m

Change setting for Sets the value for the option. For memory configuration, select the amount of memory that currently resides in the printer.

PostScript

Click the PostScript tab to display the PostScript tab dialog box, which controls the output format.

Windows 95 Users 183

184 Chapter 8 m

PostScript Output format Tells the driver to build PostScript document descriptions that print as fast as possible when “optimize for speed” is selected. Such document descriptions might not print successfully on printers with limited memory. Select “optimize for portability” to tell the driver to build PostScript document descriptions that print successfully on many different printers. Select “encapsulated PostScript” to tell the driver to build an encapsulated PostScript document description, rather than a

PostScript description. Select “archive format” to suppress many of the printer settings that might prevent the file from printing. Choose this option only if the file might be printed on unknown devices.

The following options appear only when you open the Properties dialog box from the Printer folder: m

Assume header is downloaded and retained When checked, tells the driver to send the document to the printer without the PostScript header.

The PostScript header contains instructions that the printer needs to print correctly. Select this option only if you are an advanced user with experience working with PostScript headers.

m

Send Header Now Sends the PostScript header to the printer and selects the

“Assume header is downloaded and retained” option.

m

Print PostScript error information When checked, tells the driver to print any

PostScript errors to the printer.

m

Job timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will spend trying to print a document before canceling the print job. A value of zero means that the job is never canceled.

m

Wait timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will wait for Windows to send data before canceling the print job. A value of zero means that the job is never canceled.

m

Advanced Displays the Advanced PostScript dialog box, used to set data communication protocol and format. Only experienced PostScript users should set options in the Advanced PostScript dialog box.

Advanced PostScript options

Choose the Advanced button in the PostScript tab dialog box to display the

Advanced PostScript Options dialog box.

m

PostScript language level Lets you specify which level of PostScript language to use.

m

Bitmap compression Lets you specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the printer. If you’re using PostScript language level, click No Bitmap Compression.

m

ASCII data Sends all data in Adobe Communication Protocol. ASCII data format allows the file to print on any printer.

m

Binary communications protocol Sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format.

m

Tagged binary communications protocol Sends all data except special characters in binary (8-bit) format over serial or parallel ports.

m

Pure binary data Sends all data in pure binary format. This option works only on AppleTalk or Ethernet networks.

m

Send CTRL+D before job Sends CTRL+D to the printer before a print job to reset the printer.

Windows 95 Users 185

m

Send CTRL+D after job Sends CTRL+D to the printer after a print job to notify the printer the current job is finished and to reset the printer.

m

Display alert for applications incompatible with driver features When checked, displays a message if an application might be incompatible with some driver features.

Watermarks

Click the Watermark tab to display the Watermark tab dialog box, which contains options for defining, editing, and deleting watermarks.

186 Chapter 8 m

Select a watermark Lists available watermark definitions, which can be selected and edited or deleted.

m

Edit Displays the Edit Watermark dialog box, summarized below.

m

New Displays the New Watermark dialog box, which has the same features as the Edit Watermark dialog box, summarized below.

m

Delete Deletes the selected watermark definition.

m

Print watermark Tells the printer how the watermark should be printed. You can print on the first page only rather than on all pages (the default). You can print the watermark in the foreground rather than in the background

(the default). Choose this setting if you cannot see the watermark on the printed page. You can print only the outline of the watermark. Choose this setting if the watermark is covering graphic images in the document.

m

Display area A bitmap area that displays a portrait image of what the page will look like when printed.

Edit Watermark

Choose the Edit button in the Watermark tab dialog box to display the Edit

Watermark dialog box.

m

Text Displays the text of the selected watermark for editing.

m

Font Lists all TrueType and ATM fonts and the 13 base PostScript fonts that either reside in the printer or can be downloaded to the printer.

m

Size Lets you specify a font size between 7 and 600 points.

m

Style Lets you specify a font style: Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic, as available.

m

Angle Lets you specify the angle at which the watermark will display on the page.

Windows 95 Users 187

188 Chapter 8 m

Automatically center/Position relative to center Tells the driver how to position the watermark. “Automatically center” centers the watermark on the page.

“Position relative to center” lets you specify x and y coordinates for the watermark relative to the center.

m

Color Lets you specify red, green, and blue values for the color in which the watermark is printed. As an alternative, Choose Color brings up a

Color dialog box that lets you view and select a color for the watermark.

Fonts

Click the Fonts tab to display the Fonts dialog box, which controls font substitution. The Fonts tab is available only if you open the Properties dialog box through the Printer folder.

m

Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table Tells the driver to use the Font Substitution Table to determine which PostScript fonts to substitute for TrueType fonts.

m

Edit the Table Displays the Font Substitution Table, used to substitute

PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts in your document.

m

Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts Tells the driver to ignore the Font Substitution Table and to use font-matching rules to find the best PostScript font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document.

m

Always use TrueType fonts Tells the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer when your document is printed.

m

Update Soft Fonts Lets you update the list of installed PostScript fonts so that the printer driver prints them correctly.

m

Send Fonts As Displays the Send Fonts As dialog box, used to specify how to send TrueType or PostScript fonts.

Specifying how to send TrueType or PostScript fonts

Click the Send Fonts As button in the Fonts tab to display the Send Fonts As dialog box.

m

Send TrueType fonts as Lets you specify the format used to send TrueType fonts that are not substituted with their PostScript equivalent fonts. For

Type 1 (outline) fonts, select Outlines. For Type 3 (bitmap) fonts, select

Bitmaps. Select “Don’t Send” if you don’t want any fonts sent.

m

Threshold Lets you specify the size of the font at which the PostScript driver should switch from sending TrueType fonts as Type 1 to sending them as Type 3 (bitmap) fonts.

m

Favor system TrueType fonts When checked, tells the driver to use the system

TrueType font instead of the printer font when the same font is found on both the printer and the computer.

m

Send PostScript Fonts As Lets you specify how to send PostScript fonts to the printer. Select Native Format to send PostScript fonts before your document. Select Don’t Send to send no PostScript fonts to the printer.

General

Click the General tab to display the General tab dialog box, which lets you insert comments about the printer and specify whether to use a separator page between print jobs. The General tab is available only if you open the printer Properties dialog box through the Printer folder.

m

Comment Displays any general description about the printer. Text in the

Comment option is displayed to users when they select a network printer.

m

Separator page Tells the printer to place a page between print jobs. You can select what kind of text or graphics goes on a separator page.

Windows 95 Users 189

Details

Click the Details tab to display the Details tab dialog box, which controls the printer port. The Details tab is available only if you open the printer

Properties dialog box through the Printer folder.

190 Chapter 8 m

Print to the following port Lets you specify the port your printer is attached to or the path to the network printer you’re using.

m

Add Port Click to add a new port or to specify a new network path.

m

Delete Port Click to delete a port from the “Print to the following port” list box.

m

Print using the following driver Lets you specify the type of printer you’re using.

m

New Driver Click to update your printer driver.

m

Capture Printer Port Click to map a port to a network drive.

m

End Capture Click to remove a port from a network drive.

m

Timeout settings/Not selected/Transmission retry “ Not selected” specifies how long Windows 95 waits for the printer to be online before reporting an error. “Transmission retry” specifies how long Windows 95 waits for the printer to be ready before reporting an error.

m

Spool Settings Click to specify how the document is sent from the application to the printer.

m

Port Settings Click to change your port settings.

Add Port

The Add Port dialog box lets you add a new port or specify a network path.

m

Network When selected, tells the driver you want a network printer. Specify the path to the network printer in the text box.

m

Other Lets you select another type of port, such as a FAX port.

Spool Settings

The Spool Settings dialog box specifies spool print jobs and data format.

m

Spool print jobs so program finishes printing faster When selected, saves printing information on your computer’s hard disk until the printer is ready to print.

m

Start printing after last page is spooled When selected, waits until all printing information has come from the application before sending it to the printer.

m

Start printer after first page is spooled When selected, starts sending printing information from your disk to the printer after one page has been received from the application.

m

Print directly to the printer When selected, waits until your printer is ready before sending the print job from the application to the printer.

m

Spool data format Lets you specify the format in which to store printing information on your disk while a print job is waiting to be printed.

m

Enable bidirectional support for this printer/Disable bidirectional support for this printer Specifies whether the printer should communicate with the computer bidirectionally.

Windows 95 Users 191

Sharing

The Sharing tab dialog box controls network sharing of the printer. Even if you are not using NetWare, you can still share your printer with other users on the Microsoft Network.

The Sharing tab is available only when you open the printer Properties dialog box from the Printer folder. If you don’t see the Sharing tab in the Printer folder, open the Network Control Panel. Select Microsoft Networks as your

Primary Network logon. Then select File and Print sharing. Select the options you want and restart your system. Open the printer Properties dialog box from the Printer folder. The Sharing tab should now be available.

192 Chapter 8 m

Not Shared When selected, the printer is not available to other users on the network.

m

Shared As When selected, the printer is available to other users on the network.

m

Share Name Enter the name of the shared printer. This name appears in the

Network Neighborhood window when users search for network printers.

m

Comment Enter any comments about this printer. Comments can be viewed by users searching for network printers.

m

Password Enter the optional password if you want to restrict network user access to this printer.

Using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows

The Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows program supplied with the printer software lets the printer administrator control various aspects of how the printer works. For information about using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows, see Appendix A.

Windows 95 Users 193

9

Loading Paper

This chapter describes how to load the LaserWriter 12/640 PS paper cassette and multipurpose tray with paper. It describes how to load standard paper, letterhead, three-hole punched paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies for printing.

You can purchase additional printing options for use with your LaserWriter

12/640 PS, including the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 500-Sheet Cassette and

Feeder and the LaserWriter 12/640 PS Envelope Cassette. This chapter gives instructions for loading paper or envelopes into these options. (For instructions on attaching options, see Chapter 5.)

For information on ordering options, see Appendix D.

The way you control the printer from your computer depends on the type of computer and program you are using. For general information about printing with a Mac OS–based computer, see Chapter 6. For information about printing with an IBM PC or compatible computer using Microsoft Windows or DOS, see Chapters 7 and 8. For specific information about printing with a particular program, refer to the documentation that came with the program.

For best results, Apple recommends that you use paper with weight of at least 20 lb.

195

Automatic or manual printing with the LaserWriter 12/640 PS

You can automatically print using paper from the paper cassette or using paper stacked in the multipurpose tray. You can also manually feed paper, envelopes, three-hole punched paper, labels, postcards, transparencies, and labels into the printer using the multipurpose tray.

For information about selecting automatic or manual paper feeding, or selecting the cassette or multipurpose tray to print from, see Chapter 6 if you have a Mac OS–based computer, or see Chapter 7 or Chapter 8 if you have a Windows-based computer.

Using the paper cassette

The standard paper cassette holds up to 250 sheets of paper. You can fill the cassette with U.S. letter-size paper, U.S. legal-size paper, A4 paper size, B5 paper size, executive paper size, letterhead paper, three-hole punched paper, transparencies, or labels. To refill the paper cassette, insert paper as shown in the following illustrations.

IMPORTANT Apple recommends you do not mix transparencies with other types of paper in the paper cassette. (This helps avoid paper jams.)

To reduce curl and wrinkle on heavy media, such as postcards, envelopes, and transparencies, direct the output to the face-up tray. For information about selecting the output trays to print from, see Chapter 6 if you have a

Mac OS–based computer, or see Chapter 7 or Chapter 8 if you have a

Windows-based computer.

196 Chapter 9

Letter-size paper

1 Set the length guide (located on the back of the cassette) to the position that corresponds to your paper’s length. You adjust the length guide by pushing or pulling the guide.

2 Adjust the width guide to its maximum width by squeezing the colored lever (located on the right side of the cassette) against the brace and sliding the guide outward.

3 Push down gently on the paper tray until it rests against the bottom of the cassette and locks into place.

4 Slide the paper beneath the bracket at the front left of the cassette. Push the paper down if necessary, but don’t overload the cassette, or the paper may jam when you print.

Make sure the paper fits under this corner bracket.

Slide paper under the retainers.

Loading Paper 197

5 Adjust the width guide so that it fits snugly against the paper, but not so tightly that it might cause binding.

To avoid paper jams, always set the length and width guides to the correct positions for your particular paper.

Adjust the length and width guides to fit the size paper you’re using.

198 Chapter 9

Legal and other size paper

1 Set the length guide (located on the back of the cassette) to the position that corresponds to your paper’s length. You adjust the length guide by pushing or pulling the guide.

The cassette is marked with positions for paper of U.S. letter (8-1/2 x 11), A4,

B5, Executive (7-1/4 x 10-1/2), and U.S. legal sizes (8-1/2 x 14).

2 Adjust the width guide to its maximum width by squeezing the colored lever (located on the right side of the cassette) against the brace and sliding the guide outward.

3 Push down gently on the paper tray until it rests against the bottom of the cassette and locks into place.

4 Slide the paper beneath the bracket at the front left of the cassette. Push the paper down if necessary, but don’t overload the cassette, or the paper may jam when you print.

5 Adjust the width guide so that it fits snugly against the paper, but not so tightly that it might cause binding.

To avoid paper jams, always set the length and width guides to the correct positions for your particular paper.

Letterhead paper and three-hole punched paper

Insert letterhead paper into the paper cassette face down, with the top of the letterhead at the front of the tray (the handle end).

Align letterhead and three-hole punched paper as shown.

Adjust the length and width guides to fit the size paper you’re using.

Note: If you want to print on both sides of the letterhead paper, place the letterhead paper face up in the paper cassette, with the top of the page closest to the handle.

Insert three-hole punched paper into the paper cassette so the holes are toward the left side of the cassette.

Using the multipurpose tray

The multipurpose tray can hold up to 80 sheets of various sizes, as well as envelopes, transparencies, and sheets of labels. The exact number of sheets the multipurpose tray can hold depends on the weight of the paper. You can use the multipurpose tray in several ways: m automatic printing m manual feed printing m envelope printing m postcard printing m transparency and label printing

Note: You cannot duplex print when the paper source is the multipurpose tray.

Loading Paper 199

200 Chapter 9

Opening the multipurpose tray

To use the multipurpose tray you must first open it.

1 Gently open the door.

2 Grasp the tab and slide out and extend the tray.

Placing paper and envelopes in the multipurpose tray

You can use the multipurpose tray for all your printing jobs. You can keep a small stack of paper in the tray and let the LaserWriter 12/640 PS feed the paper automatically, or you can use the multipurpose tray for manual feed printing.

By the way: If you use the Auto Select printing feature to automatically draw paper from any source that holds the correct size paper, use the Apple Printer

Utility or LaserWriter Utility for Windows to define the size of paper that the multipurpose tray holds. The printer software can then determine correctly when to draw paper from the multipurpose tray. For more information about defining the size of paper in the multipurpose tray, refer to Appendix A.

Loading Paper 201

Place the paper in the tray so that the left side of the stack is aligned with the tray’s left side. Adjust the width guide so that it just touches the right edge of the stack. Don’t adjust the guide so tightly against the stack that it causes binding or rumpling of the paper.

202 Chapter 9

Adjust this guide to fit the width of your paper.

For manual-feed printing, place a single sheet of paper, labels, or transparency film or a single envelope in the multipurpose tray.

The multipurpose tray holds up to 80 sheets of paper. When there is no paper left in the tray, the Paper Out light comes on.

By the way: You can have the LaserWriter 12/640 PS print using a first sheet from the multipurpose tray and all following sheets from the paper cassette

(or vice versa).

For example, you can place letterhead paper in the multipurpose tray and use it for printing the first page of a letter, and print all following pages on plain paper from the paper cassette.

For more information about selecting paper trays for printing, see Chapter 6 if you have a Mac OS–based computer, or see Chapter 7 or Chapter 8 if you have a Windows-based computer.

Loading three-hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray

You can load a stack of three-hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray for automatic printing. You can also print on three-hole punched paper manually by feeding one sheet at a time.

This illustration shows how to load a stack of three-hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray.

Align three-hole punched paper along the left edge of the tray.

Loading Paper 203

204 Chapter 9

Loading letterhead paper in the multipurpose tray

You can load a stack of letterhead in the multipurpose tray for automatic printing. You can also print letterhead manually by feeding one sheet at a time.

This illustration shows how to load a stack of letterhead in the multipurpose tray.

Place letterhead paper face up in the tray, with the top of the page

“in” (closest to the printer).

R

Loading envelopes in the multipurpose tray

You can load a stack of 10 envelopes in the multipurpose tray for automatic printing. You can also print envelopes manually by feeding them one envelope at a time.

This illustration shows how to load a stack of envelopes in the multipurpose tray.

Stack the envelopes so that the tops are to the right and the flaps are down.

Slide the width guide so that it rests against the envelopes.

Adjust the width guide on the multipurpose tray to the size of the envelope.

Hint: Direct the envelope to the face-up output to reduce curl.

If you print many envelopes: You can obtain an envelope cassette from an Apple-authorized dealer that allows you to feed up to 50 envelopes automatically.

WARNING Don’t use envelopes that have fasteners, snaps, or windows when printing with the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. Also don’t use envelopes that seal with peel-off strips or pressure-sensitive adhesives, that are curled or wrinkled, or that are likely to discolor or melt at temperatures of about 400° F (204° C). Printing on such materials can damage the printer.

Loading Paper 205

206 Chapter 9

For best results when printing envelopes, be sure to position your address block properly in your word-processing document. You’ll need to print in landscape (horizontal) orientation and to adjust the top and left margins in your word-processing program’s page formatting controls.

Once you’ve set the top and left margins, type the return address, skip a few lines (the exact number depends on the font you’re using and the way you like your envelopes to look, so you’ll have to experiment), and type the address block.

Note: If the multipurpose tray and the optional envelope cassette have the same size envelopes when automatic tray switching is on, the printer will use the multipurpose tray first (if the multipurpose tray is set to the envelope size). To use the envelope cassette, do one of the following: m Pick the envelope cassette as the paper source in the Print dialog box.

m Set the multipurpose tray to a size other than the one used by the envelope cassette. (You can do this with the Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS or the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.) m Change the optional envelope cassette to “Installed and Preferred” in the

Setup dialog box. (You can view the setup dialog box by selecting the desktop printer icon and choosing Change Setup from the Printing menu.)

Printing an envelope

1 Open the multipurpose tray.

2 Adjust the width guide to fit the envelope.

3 Tuck the envelope flap inside the envelope.

This helps prevent the flap from causing a paper jam. (Some envelopes come unglued when subjected to the heat inside the printer. High-quality envelopes are likely to hold up better during the printing process.)

4 Set your program to print lengthwise on the envelope.

On a Mac OS–based computer, choose Page Setup from the File menu, select the Landscape orientation icon, and click OK.

On a Windows 3.1–based computer, open the Printer Setup dialog box and select Landscape in the Orientation option.

On a Windows 95–based computer, open the print Properties dialog box and select Landscape in the Paper tab.

5 Set your program to print using the multipurpose tray.

On a Mac OS–based computer, choose Print from the File menu, select

Manual Feed from the Paper Source pop-up menu, and click Print.

On a Windows 3.1–based computer, open the Printer Setup dialog box, select the multipurpose tray from the Paper Source options, and click OK to close the Setup dialog box. Choose the Print command from the File menu and click OK.

On a Windows 95–based computer, open the print Properties dialog box and select the multipurpose tray from the Paper Source option in the Paper tab.

6 When the printer’s Paper Out indicator light flashes, insert the first envelope and slide it forward until it stops.

Insert the envelope face up (flap down) with the top edge to the right as it enters the printer.

On a Mac OS–based computer, if Background Printing is turned on in the

Chooser, a PrintMonitor message prompts you to insert an envelope.

7 If you are printing several envelopes, insert the next envelope when the Paper Out light flashes again.

Do not feed the next envelope before the light prompts you to, or the envelope may jam.

Loading Paper 207

208 Chapter 9

Loading labels in the multipurpose tray

You can load one sheet of labels at a time into the multipurpose tray for manual printing.

Insert the sheet of labels into the paper cassette face up.

Use only labels recommended for use in laser printers.

Don’t attempt to print sheets that have labels missing. This may cause a jam.

IMPORTANT When you print labels, use the multipurpose tray. (This helps avoid paper jams and curling.)

Loading transparencies in the multipurpose tray

You can load one sheet of overhead transparency at a time into the multipurpose tray for manual printing, or you can place a stack of about 40 transparencies in the tray for automatic feed.

To avoid leaving fingerprints (and ensure the best image quality), handle transparencies by their edge.

IMPORTANT When you print overhead transparencies, Apple recommends you use the multipurpose tray and use the face-up output tray for delivering printed transparencies. (This helps avoid paper jams and curling.)

Only use transparencies recommended for use in laser printers.

Loading Paper 209

Choosing paper

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS prints on standard laser-quality paper (16- to 28pound stock). For the best results, Apple recommends 20-pound stock. The printer can accept stock of up to 32 pounds from the multipurpose tray. You can also expect excellent results on most colored and textured papers.

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS produces high-quality transparencies for overhead projection. Medium-weight photocopier transparencies work best. If you experience difficulties when attempting to print transparencies with automatic feed, use manual feed instead.

WARNING Do not use heat-transfer (thermal) transparencies in the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS. They will not print properly and may separate in the printer.

To avoid paper problems, keep the following potential trouble sources in mind: m

Temperature Some letterheads are printed with low-temperature dyes that vaporize and smear at the temperatures inside the printer. Some glossy, coated letterheads may lose their coating in the printer. Similarly, some envelopes may seal or come unglued during printing. Using high-quality stationery and envelopes should ensure satisfactory results.

m

Paper texture The LaserWriter 12/640 PS may not print well on rough or highly textured paper. Try a few sheets to test the quality.

m

Paper finish The LaserWriter 12/640 PS may not print well on some papers with a glossy finish. Again, test a few sheets of any unusual paper stock you wish to use.

210 Chapter 9

Filling the optional envelope cassette

1 Slide the envelope cassette out of the 500-sheet feeder.

2 Move the postcard guide to the back of the envelope cassette, if necessary.

To remove the postcard guide from the envelope tray, pinch the indented area against the front of the guide. Roll the guide toward the front of the envelope cassette and lift up.

To insert the postcard guide in the back of the envelope cassette, tilt the guide toward the front of the envelope cassette and insert the two tabs located on front of the guide into the slots. Roll the guide until its back is against the back of the envelope cassette and locks into place.

3 Push down gently on the envelope tray until it rests against the bottom of the cassette and locks into place.

4 Lift the back of the envelope cassette and move the length guide until it matches your envelope’s length. Make sure the tab fits into the marked slots.

The cassette is marked with positions for envelopes of Comm10, C5, DL, and

Monarch sizes.

5 Pinch the color tab (located on the right side of the envelope cassette) against the post and move the envelope width to its maximum setting.

6 Insert the envelopes into the cassette with the flap side up and the top edge to the right.

Make sure the envelopes are under this roller.

Adjust this guide to fit the length of the envelopes.

Adjust the width guide here.

Loading Paper 211

212 Chapter 9

7 Adjust the width guide so that it fits snugly against the envelope, but not so tightly that it might cause binding.

To avoid envelope jams, always set the length and width guides to the correct positions for your particular envelope.

8 Insert the envelope cassette into the 500-sheet feeder.

Note: If the multipurpose tray and the optional envelope cassette have the same size envelopes when automatic tray switching is turned on, the printer will use the multipurpose tray first (if the multipurpose tray is set to the envelope size). To use the envelope cassette, do one of the following: m Pick the envelope cassette as the paper source in the Print dialog box.

m Set the multipurpose tray to a size other than the one used by the envelope cassette. (You can do this with the Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS or the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.) m Change the optional envelope cassette to “Installed and Preferred” in the

Setup dialog box. (You can view the Setup dialog box by selecting the desktop printer icon and choosing Change Setup from the Printing menu.)

Filling with postcards

1 Remove the postcard guide from the back of the envelope cassette by pinching the indented area against the front of the guide and rolling the guide toward the front of the envelope cassette.

2 Insert the postcard guide in the envelope tray. To insert the guide, tilt it toward the front of the envelope cassette and insert the two tabs located on the front of the guide into the slots. Roll the guide until its back is against the envelope tray and locks into place.

Rotate and lift the postcard attachment.

Insert the postcard attachment here.

3 Push down gently on the envelope tray until it rests against the bottom of the cassette and locks into place.

4 Lift the back of the envelope cassette and move the length guide until it matches your postcard’s length. Make sure the tab fits into the marked slots.

5 Pinch the color tab (located on the right side of the envelope cassette) against the post and move the envelope width to its maximum setting.

6 Insert the postcards into the envelope tray.

The side of the postcard to be printed should be face down with the top of the postcard to the right.

7 Adjust the width guide so that it fits snugly against the postcard, but not so tightly that it might cause binding.

To avoid jams, always set the length and width guides to the correct positions for your particular postcard.

8 Insert the envelope cassette into the 500-sheet feeder.

Note: To avoid curled postcards, direct the output to the face-up output tray.

Loading Paper 213

Filling the optional 500-sheet cassette

1 Slide the cassette out of the 500-sheet cassette and feeder.

2 Set the length guide (located on the back of the cassette) to the position that corresponds to your paper’s length. You adjust the length guide by pulling up on one corner of the guide and then the other.

The cassette is marked with positions for paper of U.S. letter (8-1/2 x 11), A4, and U.S. legal sizes (8-1/2 x 14).

3 Adjust the width guide to its maximum setting by squeezing the colored lever (located on the right side of the cassette) against the brace and sliding the guide outward.

4 Push down gently on the paper tray until it rests against the bottom of the cassette and locks into place.

5 Slide the paper beneath the bracket at the front left of the cassette. Push the paper down if necessary, but don’t overload the cassette, or the paper may jam when you print.

Make sure the paper fits under these brackets.

Adjust this guide to fit the length of your paper.

Adjust this guide to fit the width of your paper.

214 Chapter 9

6 Adjust the width guide so that it fits snugly against the paper, but not so tightly that it might cause binding.

To avoid paper jams, always set the length and width guides to the correct positions for your particular paper.

7 Insert the paper cassette into the 500-sheet feeder.

Loading the 500-sheet cassette with letterhead and three-hole punched paper

Insert letterhead paper into the 500-sheet cassette face down, with the top of the letterhead at the front of the tray (the handle end).

If you want to print on both sides of the letterhead paper, place the letterhead paper face up in the paper cassette, with the top of the page closest to the handle.

Insert three-hole punched paper into the paper cassette so the holes are toward the left side of the 500-sheet cassette.

Make sure paper fits under this corner bracket.

Orient three-hole punched paper and letterhead paper as shown.

Loading Paper 215

10

Maintenance

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS is designed for trouble-free service. Maintenance involves little more than putting in a new toner cartridge every 6,000 pages or so and performing a few minor cleaning tasks. The recommended service interval is 120,000 pages to check and service wear on the rollers and fuser.

This service can be arranged through an Apple-authorized dealer.

217

Safety first

The fixing roller assembly in the LaserWriter 12/640 PS operates at very high temperatures—around 400° F (204° C). Allow the rollers to cool before performing maintenance and troubleshooting.

Hot area

D

Hot area

218 Chapter 10

Precautions during maintenance

To prevent damage to the printer while performing maintenance, observe the following precautions.

m Don’t lubricate the printer.

m Don’t attempt to disassemble the printer.

m Don’t place anything on top of the printer.

Regular maintenance

The toner cartridge holds the toner powder that forms the printed images.

Each cartridge should yield about 6,000 pages. If you print many graphic images, you may need to change cartridges more often. If your pages start to look too light, or if you see vertical white regions in dark images, it may be time to change the cartridge.

For ordering information, see Appendix D.

Replacing the toner cartridge

Whenever you install a new toner cartridge, you should also clean the interior of the printer. Follow these steps to replace the cartridge and clean the interior of the printer.

WARNING Use only cartridges designed for use with your LaserWriter

12/640 PS Printer. Other cartridges may not fit and may damage the printer

Maintenance 219

220 Chapter 10

1 Open the printer cover.

Lift this latch to open the top cover.

2 Remove the used cartridge.

Pull the cartridge up and out.

3 Slide the yellow plastic square back and forth to remove any toner residue.

Slide the square back and forth.

4 Take the new cartridge out of its packaging.

Maintenance 221

222 Chapter 10

5 Distribute the toner powder by gently rocking the cartridge back and forth.

6 Firmly pull the tab directly away from the cartridge to remove the sealing tape.

WARNING Be sure to pull the tab straight out of the cartridge. Don’t pull too quickly or at an angle—either might damage the toner seals within the cartridge.

7 Align the arrow on the left side of the toner cartridge with the arrow on the left side of the printer, then slide the cartridge downward into the printer. Make sure the toner cartridge is inserted all the way and properly seated inside the printer.

Make sure the toner cartridge is inserted all the way and properly seated inside the printer.

Maintenance 223

8 Close the printer and resume printing.

224 Chapter 10

Cleaning the exterior

Unplug the power cord and then wipe the exterior of the printer with a clean, soft, damp cloth. Use a mild soap or detergent if necessary, but never use an ammonia-based cleaner. Be careful not to get any liquid in the power cord port.

WARNING Never use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS. They may react chemically with the toner and with the printer’s plastic case.

11

Fixing Paper and Image Problems

This chapter provides solutions to problems you may encounter with paper jams or print quality while using your LaserWriter 12/640 PS. The first section discusses how to read the printer’s indicator lights to help you identify and solve problems, and how to clear paper jams. The rest of the chapter covers specific problems that can occur when you are printing a document.

225

Checking the indicator lights

The lights on the front panel of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS indicate the printer’s operating status.

Light

Ready/In Use

Paper Out

Paper Jam

On

Printer is ready to use.

Paper cassette is empty.

There is a paper jam.

Off

Printer cannot print because of an error, or the cover is open, or the printer is turned off.

Paper supply is OK.

Paper is OK

Flashing

Printer is warming up, printing a startup page, or processing data for the next print job.

Printer is ready for sheet of manual-feed paper.

Toner cartridge is.

not installed.

If the Paper Out and Paper Jam lights flash alternately, or all three lights stay on, the printer requires service. If you have just installed additional memory

(RAM) in the printer, there may be a problem with the memory. Open the printer and make sure the SIMMs are fully seated in the correct sockets that match one of the supported configurations listed in Chapter 5 and in

Appendix D.

226 Chapter 11

Checking for and clearing paper jams

Occasionally a piece of paper may get stuck inside the printer during the printing process. Follow these steps to find and clear a paper jam.

IMPORTANT If you experience paper jams after you first set up the printer, check all areas of the printer to make sure that the packing materials have been removed.

1 Check the paper exit area on top of the printer to see whether the paper is jammed there.

If so, gently pull the paper out.

If you cannot easily remove the paper, skip to step 2. If the paper jam is in this location and you successfully removed the paper, go to step 5.

Fixing Paper and Image Problems 227

228 Chapter 11

2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge. If the jam is around the pressure roller area, remove the paper as shown here:

If you cannot remove the paper, pull the paper from within the printer, first pulling into the printer, then out toward you to free it.

3 Remove the paper cassette to see whether the jam is in the paper cassette area. If so, gently release or pull out the jammed paper.

Check that all paper edges are under the bracket at the front of the cassette.

Paper edges over the bracket are also considered paper jams.

4 Check the multipurpose tray (if you are using it) to see whether paper has jammed there.

If so, gently pull the paper out.

5 Once you have removed the jammed paper, reinsert the toner cartridge, close the top cover, and slide the paper cassette back into the printer.

Note: You must open and close the top cover to reset the printer.

Fixing Paper and Image Problems 229

230 Chapter 11

Checking the optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder

m

Remove the paper cassette to see whether the jam is in the paper cassette area. If so, gently release or pull out the jammed paper.

Check that all paper edges are under the bracket at the front of the cassette.

Papers edges over the bracket are also considered paper jams.

If you have removed the jammed paper, open and close the top cover to reset the printer.

Checking the optional duplex printing unit

1 Remove the the duplex printing unit tray to see whether the jam is in the tray area. If so, gently pull out the jammed paper.

Hint: It may be difficult to view paper jams in the duplex printing unit tray area because paper jams may occur toward the back of the tray area. Look for wrinkled or curled edges indicating a paper jam.

2 Open the duplex printing unit’s door to see whether the jam is around the paper guide for the duplex printing unit. If so, gently pull out the jammed paper.

Fixing Paper and Image Problems 231

3 Check around the roller area. You may have to push the roller to see if a paper is behind the roller.

4 Once you have removed the jammed paper, slide the tray back into the duplex printing unit and close the door.

5 Open and close the top cover to reset the printer.

Avoiding paper and envelope jams and wrinkling

Depending on the quality of paper and envelopes that you use, some papers or envelopes may jam or wrinkle as they pass through the printer.

If you experience paper jams, loosen up the stack of paper by fanning it before you load it into the paper cassette. Be sure not to overload the cassette.

With stiffer paper stock, try printing the paper from the multipurpose tray, which provides a straighter feed into the printer than from the cassettes.

232 Chapter 11

Problems with printed documents

This section provides remedies for problems in the appearance of a printed document.

The quality of grayscale art could be better.

Turn on the PhotoGrade feature, as described in Chapter 6 for Mac OS users and Chapters 7 and 8 for Windows users. Also, try turning off the FinePrint feature.

Note: You’ll need at least 12 MB memory to use PhotoGrade.

Paper curls when you print on it.

Use only 16- to 24-pound laser-quality or photocopy bond paper for automatic feed and 16- to 32-pound paper for manual-feed printing. If you are using the correct weight and the paper still curls, try using a different brand of paper.

Toner does not stay fixed on the paper.

If the toner does not stick to the paper, try using different paper. Best results are obtained with laser-quality or photocopy bond paper.

The printer prints on only part of the paper, printing is off-center, or images are out of place.

Make sure that you have selected the appropriate paper source, paper size, and orientation in your printing software. (On a Mac OS–based computer, click the Page Image icon in the Page Setup dialog box; if you want to narrow the margins to print on more of the page, you can select Larger Print Area in the Options portion of the Page Setup dialog box.)

Check the paper width guide in the cassette. If the width guide is set too wide, the paper may be fed into the printer at an angle.

Also check that the margins set in your document are correct, that you are not using a type of paper that is causing a feeding problem, and that the paper cassette isn’t too full.

Fixing Paper and Image Problems 233

234 Chapter 11

Nothing is printed on the paper.

If you get a blank document, try the following steps.

m If the cartridge is new, be sure to remove the plastic tape.

m Redistribute the toner powder by gently rocking the toner cartridge.

If you still get a blank document, the cartridge has run out of toner and needs replacing.

The image prints in black and white although the original document is in color or grayscale.

If the printed image contains only black and white areas instead of grays, try the following step.

m Check to make sure that grayscale printing is turned on (on a Mac

OS–based computer, select the Color/Grayscale option in the Print Options dialog box).

The image is too light.

If the printed images are too light, try the following steps.

m Change the print density to a darker level.

m Replace the toner cartridge.

If you are using a Mac OS–based computer, you can change print density with the Apple Printer Utility. For more information, see Appendix A. If you are using an IBM PC or compatible computer, you can change print density with the LaserWriter Utility for Windows. For more information, see

Appendix A.

The image is too dark.

If the image is too dark, try the following steps.

m Change the print density to a lighter level (see Appendix A).

m Replace the toner cartridge; it may need to be changed.

The page prints solid black.

If your document prints black, turn your printer off and on again. If your document still prints black your printer needs servicing.

Printer prints simplex even though duplex printing is specified.

If your document prints in simplex mode (only on one side) instead of duplex mode, check the following: m Is the optional duplex printing unit installed?

m Does the printer have at least 12 MB of memory?

m Is duplex printing selected in the Print dialog box?

Unwanted lines or stripes appear.

If white or dark vertical or horizontal lines or stripes appear on the page, try the following remedies. (Each procedure is described in detail in “Replacing the Toner Cartridge” in Chapter 10.) m Gently rock the cartridge to redistribute the toner.

m Replace the toner cartridge.

m Clean the mirror by sliding the yellow plastic square back and forth to remove any toner residue.

The image is wavy or distorted.

If a gray shaded area appears wavy or distorted, the toner cartridge may be low, or the toner may need to be redistributed (see “Replacing the Toner

Cartridge” in Chapter 10).

Toner smudges appear on front or back of paper.

If stains appear on the paper, try the following steps.

m Toner smudges may occur after a paper jam. In most cases, the printer cleans itself after printing several letter-size pages.

m You may have previously printed using paper that was too small for the printed document, which may have caused some toner to be deposited inside the printer instead of on the paper. This can cause smudges on the paper that goes through later. In most cases, the printer cleans itself after printing several letter-size pages.

Fixing Paper and Image Problems 235

236 Chapter 11

Faded areas or white voids appear on the page.

If portions of the page are faded or are missing, try the following steps: m Use different paper or transparency material.

m Use paper that has been in a sealed wrapper; paper that has been out for a long time may have too much moisture in it.

m Redistribute the toner in the cartridge (see “Replacing the Toner Cartridge” in Chapter 10).

m Use the Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS or LaserWriter Utility for

Windows to change the print density to a darker level (see Appendix A).

m Replace the toner cartridge (see “Replacing the Toner Cartridge” in

Chapter 10).

Blotchy areas or ghost images appear on the page.

If there are blotchy areas within a gray area, or if you see ghosting of images within printed areas (particularly on the top few inches of the page), try the following step.

m Print two or three more copies of your page; these problems often occur only on the first rotation of the photosensitive drum inside the printer.

The printer isn’t printing from the correct paper tray.

m Check that the correct page size is selected in the Mac OS or Windows

Page Setup dialog box.

12

Fixing Other Problems

This chapter provides solutions to problems you may have printing with the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS from Mac OS, Windows, DOS, and UNIX computers.

Troubleshooting with the indicator lights

To diagnose and fix problems by checking the indicator lights on the front of the printer, see Chapter 11.

Mac OS–based computer troubleshooting

If you are using the LaserWriter 12/640 PS from a Mac OS–based computer, use this section for troubleshooting tips.

The Chooser does not appear in the Apple (

K

) menu.

If the Chooser isn’t listed in the Apple menu, the System file on your startup disk may be outdated, or you may have removed the Chooser from the Apple

Menu Items folder in the System Folder on your startup disk. You can obtain the current system software from an Apple-authorized dealer.

Make sure that you have only one System Folder on your startup disk.

237

238 Chapter 12

No LaserWriter 8 icon appears in the Chooser.

Make sure that the LaserWriter 8 driver is properly installed. The printer driver may be on your startup disk but may have been moved to the wrong location. If necessary, drag the driver into the Extensions folder inside the

System Folder.

Also make sure that you have only one System Folder on your startup disk.

Refer to the information that came with your computer.

The printer is not listed in the Chooser.

If you’ve selected the LaserWriter 8 icon but your LaserWriter 12/640 PS is not named in the list of printers, one of the following may be the cause.

m The printer has been turned off. Make sure it is plugged in and turned on, and wait for the Ready light to turn on.

m The communications settings are not set correctly. See “Adjusting

Communication Settings” in Chapter 1 and Appendix A. See also

Appendix D for a list of acceptable values. To reset the communications settings to their factory default values, set the communication switch to the

Reset (out) position. Turn the printer off and back on again. Set the communication switch to the Normal (in) position.

m Someone may have renamed the printer. Check the startup page to see if the name has changed.

m If you are using an AppleTalk network that contains zones, you may not have selected the correct zone for the printer.

m There’s a problem in the network cable system somewhere between your computer and the printer you want to use. Make sure that all the cables are properly connected. If you still can’t resolve the problem, the printer’s electronics or the network connector boxes may not be functioning properly. Call an Apple-authorized dealer.

m The printer has the same name as other printers on the network. If that’s the case, the printer automatically appends a number to the end of its name when it’s turned on. The number may change each time you turn on the printer. The printer administrator can change the name using the Apple

Printer Utility for the Mac OS or the Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows, as described in Appendix A. You can identify your printer by looking for the printer with the same Ethernet address that is printed on the startup page.

m Check the Network control panel to make sure the correct network is selected.

The printer appears more than once in your Chooser (for example, LaserWriter 12/640 PS and LaserWriter 12/640 PS 1).

Your printer may be connected to a LocalTalk network and an EtherTalk network with a router that connects them as one logical zone. Apple recommends that you disconnect the LocalTalk port.

An “out of memory” message appears on your screen when you try to print.

The printer may have insufficient memory to print if m the document contains too many fonts that need to be downloaded from your computer to the printer m the document contains complex images m you use a lot of fonts in your document but have not selected Unlimited

Downloadable Fonts in the Page Setup Printer Options dialog box

If a page contains very complex images, try to remove some of the complex detail from that page (or spread the information over two pages) and try again to print it. Also, find Desktop PrintMonitor in the Extensions folder in the

System Folder and use the Get Info command to increase its memory size.

If you encounter the “out of memory” message frequently, you can remedy this by increasing the amount of memory in the printer. See Chapter 5.

Fixing Other Problems 239

240 Chapter 12

Printer-specific options don’t appear in the Print dialog box.

Make sure the hardware options are properly installed in the printer, as described in Chapter 5.

If the desktop printer extension is turned on, select a desktop printer icon.

Choose Change Setup from the Printing menu, then click Auto Setup in the dialog box that appears.

If the desktop printer extension is turned off, open the Chooser and click the

LaserWriter 8 icon. Click the Setup button, then click Auto Setup in the dialog box that appears.

Nothing is printed; no paper comes out of the printer.

If you don’t get any response from the printer when you try to print a document, try the following steps: m Make sure you printed to the intended printer.

m Check your desktop printer for error messages. Double-click the desktop printer icon to open the Desktop PrintMonitor.

m Try printing again, but select the Print Detailed Report option. (Choose the

Print command. Choose PostScript Error Handling, then select Print

Detailed Report.) m Check the Chooser to be sure the printer is selected. Be sure to select the printer’s name, as well as the LaserWriter 8 icon and, if necessary, the

AppleTalk network zone.

m Check the Paper Out light. If it is on, add paper and replace the paper cassette.

m Check for a paper jam as described in Chapter 11.

m Check the network cables.

m Turn the printer off and back on. Check the startup page.

m Reinstall the printer software on your computer’s startup disk.

m Reset the communications settings to their factory default values by setting the communication switch to the Reset (out) position. Turn the printer off and back on again. Set the communication switch to the Normal (in) position.

A message on the screen says the printer can’t print.

If you get such a message, try these steps: m Make sure that the printer is turned on.

m Check the network cables.

m Make sure your startup disk has the LaserWriter 8 driver in the Extensions folder, which is inside the System Folder.

m Make sure the printer is selected in the Chooser. Be sure to select the printer’s name as well as the LaserWriter 8 icon and, if your network has zones, the correct AppleTalk network zone.

m Make sure that the printer has paper correctly installed.

Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect.

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS automatically goes into an energy-saving mode after it’s been idle for a while. When you print while it’s in this mode, the printer takes about a minute to warm up before it can print the first page.

A desktop printer icon appears again as soon as you drag it to the Trash.

You must always have at least one desktop printer icon. If you drag your last desktop printer to the Trash, the computer instantly creates another one just like it. To remove all desktop printer icons, turn off the desktop printing extension and then restart your computer.

The desktop printer icons appear as folders.

If you restart the computer using a startup disk that doesn’t contain up-to-date

LaserWriter printing software, your desktop printer icons will appear as folders. Though they won’t work as usual, they will return to normal when you restart from the correct startup disk. You may also install the software on the new startup disk.

Fixing Other Problems 241

242 Chapter 12

The desktop printer icon has an X drawn through it.

The X indicates that the desktop printing software is turned off or the

LaserWriter 8 extension is not in the Extensions folder.

m You may have started the computer using a different startup disk or temporarily turned off all the software extensions. When you restart the computer as usual, the icons will return to normal.

m You may have removed the desktop printing software that created the printer icons. If you meant to do so, you can drag the icons to the Trash or to any folder outside the Extensions folder. If not, you can reinstall the software as explained in Chapter 2.

The desktop printing software needs more memory on the computer.

If the Desktop PrintMonitor needs more memory, try closing open windows and quitting open programs. Each desktop printer that you use also requires memory, so try reducing the number of desktop printer icons on your desktop by dragging desktop printers you no longer need to the Trash. You can also allocate more memory to the Desktop PrintMonitor. To allocate more memory, open the Extensions folder in your System Folder and select the

Desktop PrintMonitor icon. Choose Get Info from the File menu and enter a larger amount of memory in the Preferred Size box, then close the

Get Info box.

I want to turn the manual feed message on or off.

When you install the printer software, the Desktop PrintMonitor is set up to notify you about manually feeding paper the same way your PrintMonitor was set. For example, if you turned off notification for manual feeding in your

PrintMonitor, the Desktop PrintMonitor will also have manual feed notification turned off.

If you want to change how the Desktop PrintMonitor notifies you about manual feeding, follow this procedure:

1 Select the desktop printer icon.

2 Choose Show Manual Feed Alert from the Printing menu.

A checkmark by this command means that manual feed message is on.

IBM PC or compatible troubleshooting

If you are using the LaserWriter 12/640 PS from an IBM PC or compatible computer, use this section for troubleshooting tips.

A message on the screen says the printer can’t print.

If you get such a message, try the following steps.

m Make sure that the printer is turned on.

m Check the network or parallel cables.

m Make sure that the PostScript printer driver has been installed as described in Chapter 3.

Nothing is printed; no paper comes out of the printer.

If you don’t get any response from the printer when you try to print a document, try the following steps: m Check the Installed Printers list to see that your printer is selected. See

Chapter 7 for details about installing and selecting printer driver options.

m Try printing the document again, but choose Download PostScript Error

Handling in the Printer Setup PostScript Options dialog box.

m Check the Paper Out light. If it is on, add paper and replace the paper cassette. If it is blinking, make sure the paper cassette is securely in place.

m Check for a paper jam as described in Chapter 11.

m Check the printer cables.

m Check the position of the port communication switch as described in

“Adjusting Communication Settings” in Chapter 1. The port may have been turned off or the Interpreter settings may not be correct.

m Reset the communications settings to their factory default values by setting the communication switch to the Reset (out) position. Turn the printer off and back on again. Set the communication switch to the Normal (in) position.

m Turn the printer off and back on. Check the startup page.

m Reinstall the printer driver. See Chapter 3 for details about installing the printer driver.

Fixing Other Problems 243

For Windows 95 users, check the following additional item: m Open the Printer folder, select the printer, and click Properties. click the

PostScript tab and click the Advanced button. Make sure that ASCII data and “Send CTRL+D after job” are selected.

For Windows 3.1 users, check the following additional item: m Open the Printer Control panel, select the printer, and choose Setup. Select the PostScript tab in the Properties dialog box. Make sure that Protocol

Options is set to Default if using the parallel port, or None if printing via NetWare.

Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect.

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS automatically goes into an energy-saving mode after it’s been idle for a while. When you print while it’s in this mode, the printer takes about a minute to warm up before it can print the first page.

The printer is properly connected and configured, but printing is garbled or displays unwanted characters.

Check the communication switch and make sure that the Interpreter is set to the correct value. If you are printing a PostScript document, the Interpreter mode should be PostScript or AutoSelect.

Novell NetWare troubleshooting

The printer is properly connected, but the printer’s NetWare printer name doesn’t appear in the Apple LaserWriter Utility’s list of printers to configure.

If you don’t see the printer’s name in the Apple LaserWriter Utility, try the following steps: m Make sure you have the right printer model selected.

m Make sure the NetWare file server is running.

m Turn the printer off and then on again. The printer advertises itself to the

NetWare file servers on its network segment for only 5 minutes (after power-up) to reduce network traffic.

244 Chapter 12

m Check that the NetWare file server and the printer are on the same segment of the network. If they are on different segments, you can configure the printer by specifying the IPX network number and the ethernet node address. See “Connecting to a Network Printer Manually” in

Appendix A.

m Check the printer’s frame type, printed on the startup page. Make sure it matches your computer’s frame type or your NetWare file server’s frame type. If the frame type is different, use the Connect to the Printer Manually command to change the frame type to the desired value. See “Connecting to a Network Printer Manually” in Appendix A for more information.

The printer is properly connected and configured, but printing is garbled or displays unwanted characters.

If your printer is connected to the server through a parallel port connection, display the PostScript Options dialog box and make sure that Protocol

Options is set to Default. This dialog box is available through the Setup command in your application’s File menu. See “Additional Printer Options” in

Chapter 7 for more information on protocol options.

My text documents print fine, but I have problems with spreadsheets and graphics.

Try removing the banner page, auto-end capping, tabs expansion, and form feeds. Use the DOS CAPTURE command to set the following printing options:

/nb /na /nff /nt /ti=30

Fixing Other Problems 245

UNIX troubleshooting

If you are using the LaserWriter 12/640 PS from a UNIX workstation, use this section for troubleshooting tips.

When I print a text file, the lines stairstep off the page.

You need to use a print queue that adds a carriage return at the end of each line. To set up the print queue, the printer administrator follows the instructions in “Step 4: Configuring Users’ Workstations” in Chapter 4. To learn the names of your local print queues, see your printer administrator, or look in your /etc/printcap file.

The document generates PostScript errors.

Make sure the language interpreter in the printer’s TCP/IP interface is set correctly. Sending a text-only document or a PCL5 document when the language interpreter is set to PostScript will generate PostScript errors.

The document generates a PostScript listing.

Make sure the language interpreter in the printer’s TCP/IP interface is set correctly. Sending a PostScript document when the language interpreter is set to PCL5 will generate a PostScript listing.

Banner page generates PostScript errors.

If the administrator sets the TCP/IP interface to interpret everything as

PostScript, he or she must not turn on the banner pages in the printcap entry.

Banner pages come out as a PostScript listing.

If the administrator sets the TCP/IP interface to interpret everything as PCL5, he or she must not turn on the banner pages using the TCP/IP Printer

Configuration Utility.

The banner page prints OK but the job that follows comes out as a PostScript listing.

Turn off the banner page in the /etc/printcap file.

The banner page prints only the system name and the remote printer name.

The lpd printing protocol does not provide the user name or filename in a way that can be included in the banner page.

246 Chapter 12

The printer administrator forgot the password for the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility.

See the service information that came with your printer to learn how to get in touch with Apple.

Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect.

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS automatically goes into an energy-saving mode after it’s been idle for a while. When you print while it’s in this mode, the printer takes about a minute to warm up before it can print the first page.

The RARP server is not responding.

If you chose to use a RARP server to assign the printer’s IP address while setting up the printer, but the server is not responding, follow these steps in order: m Verify that the rarpd daemon is running on the server. On many

UNIX systems, you can verify this by typing ps -e or ps -ax at the

UNIX prompt on the server. If the daemon isn’t running, type

/usr/etc/rarpd -a to start the daemon.

m Make sure that the server running RARP is on the same subnet as the printer.

m Check the

/etc/ethers file to verify that it contains the correct

Ethernet address and hostname.

m Check the

/etc/hosts file to verify that it contains a valid IP address and the same hostname as in the /etc/ethers file.

m Turn the printer off and then back on.

The BOOTP server is not responding.

If you chose to use a BOOTP server to assign the printer’s IP address while setting up the printer, but the server is not responding, follow these steps in order: m Make sure that the server running BOOTP is on the same subnet as the printer or that BOOTP is properly configured to run on multiple subnets.

Fixing Other Problems 247

248 Chapter 12 m Check the

/etc/bootptab file to verify m that the ip entry is a valid IP address and that it matches the address in the /etc/hosts file m the ha entry is the correct Ethernet address (found on the printer’s startup page) with no colons separating the bytes m the ht entry is either ether or ethernet m Turn the printer on and off and immediately verify that the bootpd is running. On many UNIX systems, you can accomplish this by typing ps -e or ps -ax at the UNIX prompt on the server. If the daemon is not running, type bootpd -t15 or consult the UNIX man page on bootpd .

m Turn the printer off and then back on.

I can’t ping the printer by IP name or IP address.

Follow these steps in order: m ping your own system or another host. If this ping fails, your IP software is not running, or your network is down.

m Turn the printer off and then back on. This sometimes fixes the problem itself, and it also causes the startup page to print. Use the startup page to verify the printer’s IP address.

m Verify that the IP address on the configuration page is identical to the IP address in the /etc/hosts file.

m Check the printer’s network cabling to make sure that it is connected to the network.

m Make sure the IP address is not a duplicate of one already in use on the network.

I can ping the printer, but I can’t telnet to it.

Only one user at a time can telnet to the printer.

Appendix A

Setting the Printer Default Settings

Though the printer itself has no control panel, you can configure it by using programs on computers connected to the printer: m On Mac OS–based computers, use the Apple Printer Utility and the desktop printer’s setup function.

m On Windows-based computers, use the Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows.

m On UNIX-based workstations, log in to the TCP/IP Printer Configuration

Utility using the UNIX telnet program.

249

Using the Apple Printer Utility for the Mac OS

The Apple Printer Utility program allows you to set the default settings that control how various aspects of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS work. Use it to choose the basic printer settings that you want to use for all documents.

You can also change printer settings without changing the printer’s basic defaults by changing the settings in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes.

Network users should use the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes to choose the individual settings for their documents.

IMPORTANT Changes you make with the Apple Printer Utility affect everybody who uses the printer.

Use the Apple Printer Utility to m view information about the printer, such as the AppleTalk printer name and the total number of pages the LaserWriter 12/640 PS has printed m name the printer on AppleTalk networks m download fonts to the printer m remove fonts m print font samples m turn printing of a startup page on or off m set the print density to lighten or darken printing m set paper-handling options m turn the printer’s FinePrint feature on and off m turn the printer’s PhotoGrade feature on and off m set when the printer closes print jobs to provide faster throughput m set the printer’s EtherTalk zone m view the Ethernet address m view and specify the IP address m view and configure the printer’s communication settings m send PostScript files to the printer m restart the printer m print a printer configuration page

250 Appendix A

Opening the Apple Printer Utility

The Apple Printer Utility has two windows: the Printer Selector window, which is similar to the Chooser, and the printer features window, which you use to view or change the printer’s settings.

1 Double-click the Apple Printer Utility.

The Installer puts the Apple Printer Utility in the Apple LaserWriter Software folder. You can move it wherever you like.

2 In the Printer Selector window, select and open the printer you want.

If the network has zones, click the zone where the printer is located.

Printers in that zone are listed here.

Click the name of the printer you want.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 251

To send your changes to the printer, click Send.

This category tells you about the printer you selected.

3 Click Open Printer.

The printer feature window appears with the Printer Information category displayed.

To verify that the printer received the changes you sent, click this button.

To restore the original software settings, click

Set Defaults and then Send.

You can change settings in these categories.

4 To view or change settings under a category, click the arrow beside the category name to open the category and display its information and options.

Additional options may appear that you can also open and work with. When you are finished changing options in a particular category, you can click the arrow again to collapse the options.

5 After viewing the information and making changes, click the Send button to send your changes to the printer.

6 Click the Close box to close the window.

The next sections describe configuration procedures that you can perform with the Apple Printer Utility. First select and open the printer in the Printer

Selector window. The information and procedures described in each section then present how to work with the printer features window of the utility.

252 Appendix A

Quitting the Apple Printer Utility

To quit the Apple Printer Utility: m

Choose Quit from the File menu.

Viewing printer information

You can view information about your LaserWriter 12/640 PS by displaying the printer information in the printer features window.

m

Open the Printer Information category, if necessary.

Note: The Printer Information category is automatically opened whenever you open a printer in the Apple Printer Utility.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 253

254 Appendix A

Naming the printer

To help users easily select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer from their computers, give the printer a unique name based, for example, on its location or the group of users who commonly accesses it. Use the following procedure to name or rename any LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer on the AppleTalk network.

IMPORTANT located in.

Be sure to tell users what the printer name is and what zone it’s

1 Open the Name category.

The name panel appears with the selected printer’s current name.

Type a new name here.

2 Type a new name.

3 Click Send to send the new name setting to the printer.

Downloading fonts to the printer

You can download additional fonts to the printer’s RAM to speed up printing.

You do not have to download fonts to use them in printed documents, but doing so can make printing faster than storing fonts only on your computer.

Fonts downloaded to the printer’s RAM are lost whenever the printer is turned off.

1 Open the Fonts category.

The Fonts panel appears.

The icons in the Location column show where fonts are stored—in the printer’s

ROM or RAM.

The list shows fonts already available to the printer. If you see a font here, you don’t need to add it.

2 Click Add.

A file selection dialog box appears.

3 Select the fonts you want to download.

Double-click the font name in the list or select the name and click Add.

4 Choose a destination for downloading the fonts from the Destination pop-up menu.

5 Click Send.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 255

256 Appendix A

Removing fonts

You can remove fonts from the printer’s memory when you no longer need them. You cannot remove fonts from the printer’s ROM.

1 Open the Fonts category.

The Fonts panel appears.

The icons in the Location column show where fonts are stored—in the printer’s

ROM or RAM.

You cannot remove fonts from the printer’s ROM.

2 Select the fonts you want to remove.

3 Click Remove.

4 Click OK.

Printing font samples

You can print a list of the fonts currently stored in the printer’s memory.

m

Choose Print Font Samples from the Utilities menu.

Turning the startup page on or off

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS normally prints a sample page when you turn the printer on. This page shows the printer’s name, the total number of pages printed, the amount of memory, installed options, and communication settings. You can turn this feature off if you wish.

1 Open the Startup Page category.

The Startup Page panel appears.

2 Click the checkbox to turn the startup page on or off.

When an X appears in the checkbox, the printer is set to print the startup page.

3 Click Send to send the startup page setting to the printer.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 257

Setting the print density

If your documents are printing too light or too dark, you can adjust the print density of the printer to print lighter or darker text and images.

1 Open the Print Density category.

The Print Density panel appears.

258 Appendix A

2 Drag the slider to increase or decrease the print density.

3 Click Send to send the Print Density setting to the printer.

Setting paper-handling options

When the LaserWriter 12/640 PS runs out of paper in one tray, it can automatically switch and use paper in another paper cassette or the multipurpose tray. By using automatic tray switching between the 250-sheet paper cassette and the 80-sheet multipurpose tray, you can print 330 sheets without reloading paper. If you have the optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder, and it contains the same size paper, automatic tray switching includes it as a paper source. Combining all three paper sources lets you print up to 830 sheets without reloading paper.

Note: The Paper Handling category sets the default paper-handling options for the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. You can change printer settings without changing the printer’s basic defaults by changing the settings in the Print and

Page Setup dialog boxes. Network users should use the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes to choose the individual settings for their documents.

1 Open the Paper Handling category.

The Paper Handling panel appears.

Choose the size of paper in the multipurpose tray. (If you print jobs that are a different size paper, the printer avoids the multipurpose tray.)

2 Click the checkbox to turn Automatic Tray Switching on or off.

When an X appears in the checkbox, tray switching is turned on.

3 Choose a default paper size for the multipurpose tray from the pop-up menu.

The Print dialog box provides the Auto Select option, which allows the printer to draw paper from any paper source that holds the correct size paper.

Similarly, the automatic tray switching feature allows the printer to select another paper source that holds the correct size paper when a paper source runs out. However, the printer is not able to detect the size of paper you may have placed in the multipurpose tray, so you must tell it. If the paper size for the multipurpose tray is the same as the paper in the standard paper cassette

(and automatic tray switching is turned on), the printer automatically uses the multipurpose tray as a paper source.

4 Choose a default envelope size for the envelope tray from the pop-up menu, if the envelope cassette option is installed.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 259

260 Appendix A

5 Choose printing on one side or both sides of the paper from the pop-up menu.

If you want the binding orientation along the side of the paper (like in a book or magazine), choose “two-sided, no tumbling.” If you want the binding orientation along the bottom side of the paper (like in a calendar), choose

“two-sided, with tumbling.”

Note: You must have the optional duplex printing unit to print on both sides of the paper.

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB

6 Choose the output tray from the pop-up menu.

Face Down output tray is the default. This tray is located on the top of the printer and stacks the output media face down.

The Face Up output reduces the curl of your paper by using a “straightthrough” paper path through the printer. This is useful when you print on heavy media, such as transparencies, envelopes, and postcards.

Note: You can use Face Up output with or without the optional face-up output tray. However, the face-up output tray stacks the papers neatly in a tray instead of on the surface where the printer is located.

7 Click Send to send the paper-handling settings to the printer.

Selecting imaging options

FinePrint provides smoother, less jagged printing of text characters. You can set the printer’s default setting for the FinePrint feature to on or off. Users can change this setting from the Print Options dialog box. To print high-quality images with PhotoGrade, turn off FinePrint.

PhotoGrade enhances the look of printed images, such as scanned photographs, by providing more shades of gray and better printed clarity and contrast. If your LaserWriter 12/640 PS has been upgraded to a minimum of

12 MB of memory, you can use PhotoGrade. You can set the printer’s default to have PhotoGrade turned on and off.

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB

You can also change the way images print by increasing or decreasing the number of gray levels used to reproduce them. More levels of gray produce a more natural-looking photographic quality. However, increasing the number of grays also decreases the resolution of the image. For each level of gray, a unique pattern of laser pulses is required to produce a printed dot. More gray levels require more variations in such patterns, which in turn require the printer to use larger, more noticeable dots. You can experiment with various settings to find the balance that suits your needs.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 261

1 Open the Imaging Options category.

The Imaging Options panel appears.

262 Appendix A

2 Click the FinePrint On or Off button.

3 Click the PhotoGrade On or Off button.

4 Drag the slider to change the controls.

5 Click Send to send the Imaging Options setting to the printer.

IMPORTANT When you are printing from a Mac OS–based computer,

PhotoGrade works only when the Color/Grayscale option is selected in the

Print dialog box.

Setting up job handling

You can specify how the printer handles jobs for each type of network. You can set the printer to maintain contact with the computer until all pages of a job are finished printing. This allows users to receive printer messages, such as a message telling them that the printer is out of paper, while their job is printing. You can also have the printer break contact with the computer once the print job has been sent to the printer (but is still being processed). This provides faster handling of print jobs by allowing the printer to begin processing the next job before all pages of the previous job are printed.

However, users may not receive feedback about paper outages and problems such as paper jams until after their job has been processed and the connection has been broken.

You can set job handling for individual network protocols that you use.

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position to select the custom settings.

The communication switch must be in the Normal (in) position, or the printer will reset the job-handling settings to the factory defaults when it is turned off or restarted.

Note: Changing the communication switch setting may alter some of your network settings. For example, when the switch is in the Reset (out) position, the default mode for the NetWare, TCP/IP, and parallel interfaces is

AutoSelect; but when the switch is in the Normal (in) position, the mode could be PostScript, depending on how you set the communication settings.

To change the settings, see “Viewing and Changing Communication Settings,” later in this appendix.

2 Open the Extended Job Status category.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 263

3 Click the checkboxes next to the network types to specify when the connection with the computer should be broken.

An X in a checkbox means the printer prints all pages in a job before closing the connection with the computer that requested the print job.

4 Click Send to send the job-handling configuration settings to the printer.

Setting the printer’s network zones

You can specify the EtherTalk network zone for the printer.

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position.

2 Open the Communication Configuration category.

You see a list of communication settings options.

264 Appendix A

3 Open the Printer’s Zone category.

A list of the EtherTalk zones appears.

4 Select the zone you want the printer to appear in.

5 Click Send to send the zone setting to the printer.

Changing TCP/IP configurations

You can specify the IP address of the printer. For information about determining the printer’s IP address and setting up the printer on a TCP/IP network, see Chapter 4.

1 Open the Communication Configuration category.

You see a list of communication settings options.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 265

2 Open the TCP/IP Configuration category.

A panel appears in which you can enter the IP address.

Drag the slider to change the printer’s subnet mask.

You can drag the slider only if the printer’s IP address is not 0.0.0.0.

Type the IP address here.

IP address of the default gateway used for sending packets off the local network

3 Enter the IP address.

4 Drag the slider to set the printer’s subnet mask.

5 Enter the default Gateway Address.

6 Click Send to send the TCP/IP configuration to the printer.

Viewing and changing communication settings

The standard communication settings of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS work for most environments. To make sure the printer is set up to use the standard settings, check that the communication switch on the left side of the printer is in the Normal (in) position. The switch is located below the interface connectors.

You can view and change the standard communication settings for the printer with the Apple Printer Utility. The NetWare, TCP/IP, and Parallel interfaces are set to AutoSelect, which turns on automatic language sensing. Automatic language sensing allows the printer to receive information over the network and determine which page-description language—PostScript or PCL5—is required.

266 Appendix A

You make changes to the communication settings with the printer’s communication switch set in the Normal (in) position. This makes all communication settings available for changes.

For more information about connecting the printer to LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel ports, see “Connecting the Printer” in Chapter 1. For more information about setting the communication switch on the printer, see

“Adjusting Communication Settings” in Chapter 1.

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position.

2 Open the Communication Configuration category.

You see a list of communication settings options.

3 Open the Port Configuration category.

A list of port connections and protocol choices appears.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 267

268 Appendix A

4 Choose the port settings you want.

m The LocalTalk interface is always set to PostScript mode.

m You can set the EtherTalk interface to PostScript mode or turn it off.

m You can set the NetWare interface to PostScript mode, PCL5 mode,

AutoSelect mode (which automatically senses whether PostScript or PCL5 mode should be selected), or turn it off.

m You can set the TCP/IP interface to PostScript mode, PCL5 mode,

AutoSelect mode (which automatically senses whether PostScript or PCL5 mode should be selected), or turn it off.

m You can set the Parallel interface to PostScript mode, PCL5 mode, or

AutoSelect mode (which automatically senses whether PostScript or PCL5 mode should be selected). You can also set the Parallel protocol to normal, raw, or TBCP.

IMPORTANT If you activate the EtherTalk, NetWare, or TCP/IP interface, the change does not take effect until the printer is restarted.

5 Click Send to send the communication configuration settings to the printer.

Resetting communication settings

To restore the communication settings to the factory defaults:

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Reset (out) position.

Communication switch

2 Turn the printer off and back on again.

3 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position.

Sending PostScript files to the printer

You can download PostScript files to the printer to print a PostScript program or to run a PostScript program to change the internal settings of the printer.

You can create a PostScript file in a variety of text-editing programs or by printing any document to a file (just click the File button in the Print dialog box).

1 Choose Send PostScript File from the Utilities menu.

The Send File dialog box is displayed for the currently selected printer.

2 Select the PostScript file that you want to send to the printer.

3 Click Add.

4 Click Send.

5 In the Save As dialog box, give the PostScript log file a name and path, then click OK.

The Apple Printer Utility uses the PostScript log file to record error information if an error occurs during printing.

Restarting the printer

You may need to restart the printer to clear its memory if you experience any problems printing.

1 Choose Restart from the Utilities menu.

A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you want to restart the selected printer.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 269

2 To confirm that you want to restart the printer, click Restart.

When the printer Ready light stops blinking, the printer is ready to print.

The same effect can be achieved by physically turning the printer on and off again.

IMPORTANT If the LaserWriter 12/640 PS is on a network shared by other users, make sure that no one is attempting to use the printer when you restart it. If someone’s printing job is canceled, they must resubmit it.

Manually downloaded fonts are removed from the printer’s RAM when you restart the printer.

Printing a configuration page

You can print a listing of the current configuration settings and other information about the printer. This page serves as a reference whenever you connect a computer to the printer.

m

Choose Print Configuration Page from the Utilities menu.

Using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows

The Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows program lets you change the default settings that control how various aspects of the printer work. The utility is placed in the Apple LaserWriter Software program group when the printer software is installed. Use it to set optional printer parameters that you want to use for all documents.

IMPORTANT Be sure the printer you want to configure is selected as the default printer prior to opening the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.

To change printer settings for a specific document (without changing the printer’s basic default settings), use the Print and Print Setup dialog boxes.

Network users should use the Print and Print Setup dialog boxes to choose the individual settings for their documents.

270 Appendix A

Use the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows to m name the printer m turn printing of a startup page on and off m set paper-handling options m print a list of printer fonts m configure the printer’s communication port settings m configure the printer for NetWare and TCP/IP m send PostScript files to the printer m turn the printer’s FinePrint feature on or off m turn the printer’s PhotoGrade feature on or off m print a configuration page m set the print density to lighten or darken printing m restart the printer m print page count m print Ethernet address

IMPORTANT When you use the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows to set a parameter, the setting is stored in the printer and will be used by all Mac OS,

Windows, and UNIX computers on the network.

Opening and quitting the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows

1 Start Windows, if it’s not already running.

2 Start the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.

If you’re using Windows 3.1, go to the Program Manager window and open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group. Double-click the Apple

LaserWriter Utility icon.

If you’re using Windows 95, click the Start icon on the Task-Bar, and select

Programs, Apple LaserWriter Software, Apple LaserWriter Utility.

3 In the Printer Selector window that appears, select the printer whose setup you want to change and press OK.

4 When you’re finished using the utility, choose Exit from the File menu.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 271

272 Appendix A

Naming the printer on AppleTalk networks

Each LaserWriter 12/640 PS can be given an individual name for AppleTalk networks. Use the following procedure to rename the LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

1 Choose Name Printer from the Utilities menu.

The Name Printer dialog box appears.

2 Type the new name.

3 Click OK.

A page prints confirming the printer’s new name.

Be sure to tell users what the printer name is and its location when you install the printer software on their computers or instruct them to do so.

Turning the startup page on or off

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS normally prints a sample page when you turn the printer on. This page shows the default NetWare printer’s name, the total number of pages printed, the amount of memory, and communication settings.

You can turn this feature off if you wish.

1 Choose Set Startup Page from the Utilities menu.

A dialog box appears that allows you to turn the startup page on or off.

2 Click On or Off.

3 Click OK.

A page prints confirming the choice.

Setting paper-handling options

When the LaserWriter 12/640 PS runs out of paper in one tray, it can automatically switch and use paper in the paper cassette or multipurpose tray.

By using automatic tray switching between the 250-sheet paper cassette and the 80-sheet multipurpose tray, you can print 330 sheets without reloading paper. If you have the optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder, and it contains the same size paper, automatic tray switching includes it as a paper source.

Combining all three paper sources lets you print up to 830 sheets without reloading paper.

You can also set the printer to use a particular size paper in the multipurpose tray.

1 Choose Paper Handling from the Utilities menu.

The Paper Handling dialog box appears.

2 Choose a default paper size for the multipurpose tray.

The Paper Handling dialog box provides the Auto Select option, which allows the printer to draw paper from any paper source that holds the correct size paper. Similarly, the automatic tray switching feature allows the printer to select another paper source that holds the correct size paper when a paper source runs out. However, the printer is not able to detect the size of paper you may have placed in the multipurpose tray, so you must tell it. If the paper size for the multipurpose tray is the same as the paper in the standard paper cassette (and automatic tray switching is turned on), the printer automatically uses the multipurpose tray as a paper source.

3 Choose a default envelope size for the envelope tray from the list box, if the envelope cassette option is installed.

4 Click On or Off to turn Automatic Tray Switching on or off.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 273

274 Appendix A

5 Choose the output tray from the list box.

The Face Down output tray is the default. This tray is located on the top of the printer and stacks the output media face down.

Face Up output reduces the curl of your paper by using a “straight-through” paper path through the printer. This is useful when you print on heavy media, such as transparencies, envelopes, and postcards.

Note: You can use Face Up output with or without the optional face-up output tray. However, the face-up output tray stacks the papers neatly in a tray instead of on the surface where the printer is located.

6 Choose “two-sided, no tumbling” or “two-side, with tumbling” from the duplex print list box.

If your LaserWriter 12/640 PS has been upgraded to a minimum of 12 MB of memory, and you’ve installed the optional duplex printing unit, you can print on both sides of the paper.

If you want the binding orientation along the side of the paper (like in a book or magazine), choose “two-sided, no tumbling” If you want the binding orientation along the bottom side of the paper (like in a calendar), choose

“two-sided, with tumbling.”

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

20 MB

24 MB

7 Click OK.

A page prints confirming the choice.

Printing a list or samples of printer fonts

You can print a list or samples of the PCL or PostScript fonts currently stored in the printer’s memory or attached hard disk.

1 Choose Print PostScript Fonts or Print PCL Fonts from the File menu.

For PCL fonts, samples print automatically. For PostScript fonts, the Print

Fonts dialog box appears.

2 Click Print Font Catalog or Print Font Samples.

PostScript font samples or a list of PostScript fonts are printed.

Viewing or changing communication settings

The standard communication settings of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS work for most environments. To make sure the printer is set up to use the standard settings, check that the communication switch on the left side of the printer is in the Normal (in) position. The switch is located below the interface connectors.

You can view and change the standard communication settings for the printer with the Apple LaserWriter Utility. The NetWare, TCP/IP, and Parallel interfaces are set to AutoSelect, which turns on automatic language sensing.

Automatic language sensing allows the printer to receive information over the network and determine which page-description language—PostScript or

PCL5—is required.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 275

You make changes to the communication settings with the printer’s communication switch set in the Normal (in) position. This makes all communication settings available for changes.

276 Appendix A

Communication switch

For more information about connecting the printer to LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel ports, see “Connecting the Printer” in Chapter 1. For more information about setting the communication switch on the printer, see

“Adjusting Communication Settings” in Chapter 1.

1 Choose Configure Port from the Utilities menu.

2 Choose the port settings you want.

m You can set the Parallel interface to PostScript mode, PCL5 mode, or

AutoSelect mode (which automatically senses whether PostScript or PCL5 mode should be selected). You can also set the Parallel protocol to normal, raw, or TBCP.

m The LocalTalk interface is always set to PostScript mode.

m You can set the EtherTalk interface to PostScript mode or turn it off.

m You can set the NetWare interface to PostScript mode, PCL5 mode,

AutoSelect mode (which automatically senses whether PostScript or PCL5 mode should be selected), or turn it off.

m You can set the TCP/IP interface to PostScript mode, PCL5 mode,

AutoSelect mode (which automatically senses whether PostScript or PCL5 mode should be selected), or turn it off.

IMPORTANT If you select the On mode setting to turn on the EtherTalk,

NetWare, or TCP/IP interface, the change does not take effect until the printer is turned off and back on again.

3 Click Set Port.

Resetting communication settings

To restore the communication settings to the factory defaults:

1 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Reset (out) position.

Communication switch

2 Turn the printer off and back on again.

3 Set the communication switch on the printer to the Normal (in) position.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 277

278 Appendix A

Configuring TCP/IP

You can specify the IP address of the printer. For information about determining the printer’s IP address and setting up the printer on a TCP/IP network, see Chapter 4.

1 Choose Configure TCP/IP from the Utilities menu.

2 Enter the IP address.

3 Enter the subnet mask.

You can specify a subnet mask only if the printer’s IP address is not 0.0.0.0.

4 Enter the default gateway address.

The IP address of the default gateway is used for sending packets from the local network.

5 Click OK.

Printing the Ethernet address

To print the printer’s Ethernet address: m

Choose Print Ethernet Address from the Utilities menu.

Sending PostScript files to the printer

You can download PostScript files to the printer to print a PostScript program or to run a PostScript program to change the internal settings of the

LaserWriter 12/640 PS. A PostScript file can be created in a variety of textediting programs.

For more information on setting up the printer for use with Windows and

DOS applications, see Chapter 7.

1 Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu.

A dialog box appears.

2 Select the file you want to download.

3 Click OK.

The file is downloaded to the LaserWriter 12/640 PS.

Setting imaging options

The LaserWriter Utility allows you to specify some printer imaging options, including the control of FinePrint and Photograde options and the setting of screen frequency and angle.

FinePrint provides smoother, less jagged printing of text characters. You can set the printer’s default setting for the FinePrint feature to on or off. Users can change this setting from the print Properties dialog box. To print high-quality images, turn off FinePrint.

PhotoGrade enhances the printed look of images, such as scanned photographs, by providing more shades of gray and better printed clarity and contrast. If your LaserWriter 12/640 PS has been upgraded to a minimum of

12 MB of memory, you can use PhotoGrade. You can set the printer’s default to have PhotoGrade turned on or off.

You need this much printer memory

12 MB

If you want to

Turn on PhotoGrade or use the duplex printing option

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (except legal)

Turn on PhotoGrade and duplex print on all size paper (including legal)

20 MB

24 MB

You can also change the way the images print by increasing or decreasing the number of gray levels used to reproduce them. More levels of gray produce a more natural-looking photographic quality. However, increasing the number of grays also decreases the resolution of the image. For each level of gray, a unique pattern of laser pulses is required to produce a printed dot. More gray levels require more variations in such patterns, which in turn require the printer to use larger, more noticeable dots. You can experiment with various settings to find the balance that suits your needs.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 279

280 Appendix A

1 Choose Imaging Options from the Utilities menu.

The Imaging Options dialog box appears.

2 Choose the printer resolution.

3 Click the FinePrint on or off button.

4 Click the PhotoGrade on or off button.

5 Drag the Frequency/Angle slider to set screen angle and resolution.

6 Click OK.

A page prints confirming the choice.

Printing the configuration page

You can print a listing of the current configuration settings and other information about the printer. This page serves as a reference whenever you connect a computer to the printer.

m

Choose Print Configuration Page from the Utilities menu.

Setting the print density

If your documents are printing too light or too dark, you can adjust the print density of the printer to print lighter or darker text and images.

1 Choose Print Density from the Utilities menu.

The Print Density dialog box appears.

2 Drag the slider to increase or decrease the print density.

3 Click Set.

A page prints confirming the choice.

Printing the page count

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS stores a running total of the number of pages it has printed. This total is printed on the startup page when you start the printer (if the startup page option is turned on). You can also print it using the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.

m

Choose Print Page Count from the Utilities menu.

A page prints listing the number of pages printed to date.

Specifying a font symbol set

You can use the Apple LaserWriter Utility to specify a font symbol set for use in HP LaserJet emulation.

1 Choose Font Symbol Set from the Utilities menu.

The “Specify a Symbol Set” dialog box appears.

2 Select a symbol set from the list box and click OK.

Restarting the printer

You may need to restart the printer to clear its memory if you have any problems printing. For information on troubleshooting printing problems, see

Chapters 11 and 12.

1 Choose Restart Printer from the Utilities menu.

A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm that you want to restart the selected printer.

2 Click Restart.

It takes a few minutes for the printer to restart and be ready to print.

The same effect can be achieved by turning the printer off and then on again.

IMPORTANT If the LaserWriter 12/640 PS is on a network shared by other users, make sure that no one is attempting to use the printer before you restart it.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 281

282 Appendix A

Connecting to a network printer manually

In certain situations you may need to connect to your printer manually before you can configure it. For example, m the printer is on a different network segment than the file server m the printer’s Ethernet frame type is not the frame type that you want to use

(See the “Novell Netware Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 12 for more information.)

To connect to a network printer manually, follow these steps:

1 Start Windows.

2 Start the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows.

3 In the Printer Selection window that appears, select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer.

4 Choose “Connect to Network Printer” from the Network menu.

5 Enter the eight-digit IPX Network Number and the Node Address.

The Node Address is the same address as the printer’s 12-digit Ethernet address. The printer’s Ethernet address is printed on the startup page.

Contact your network administrator if you don’t know the IPX network number.

6 Once connected, change the printer’s Ethernet frame type to use the frame type that you want.

7 Click Send to send the changes to the printer.

Using the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility

You can use telnet , a standard UNIX terminal emulation program, to log in to the printer’s configuration utility. The changes you make in the utility affect all printer users on your TCP/IP network—you don’t need to repeat this process for each workstation on the network. You can use the utility to m print a configuration page m show information about the TCP/IP interface m turn PostScript banner pages on or off for TCP/IP print jobs m change the printer’s IP address m set the TCP/IP subnet mask m identify the default gateway IP address m enable or disable TCP/IP connection timeout checking m change the password for this utility m reset the printer’s TCP/IP interface m restore all settings to the factory defaults

Logging in to the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility

To run the utility, follow these steps:

1 Use telnet to log in to the printer’s TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility by typing telnet printer_IP_name

The printer responds by displaying a message on your screen welcoming you to the Configuration Utility.

2 Enter a password.

The first time you log in to the printer, it requires you to assign a password to the utility. The password must be between 5 and 10 characters long. The characters you type will not appear on the screen.

Subsequently, you will need to enter the password to use the utility. The characters you type will not appear on the screen.

Note: You can change the password using this utility, as explained later in this appendix.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 283

284 Appendix A

Quitting the Configuration Utility

1 Go to the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility.

2 Press Enter.

3 If you’re asked if you want to save changes, type Y and press Enter to save the changes, or just press Enter to discard the changes.

Printing the configuration page

The configuration page shows setup information for the printer itself and for all of the network interfaces.

1 Go to the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility.

2 Type 1 and press Enter.

Displaying information about the printer’s TCP/IP interface

To see information displayed on your screen about the printer’s TCP/IP interface, follow these steps:

1 Go to the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility.

2 Type 2 and press Enter.

Turning the banner page feature on or off

The banner page feature prints an identification page at the beginning of each document. The banner page is printed using the PostScript page description language, so turn it on only if the printer’s TCP/IP interface is set up to receive PostScript language print jobs, as it is by default.

To turn the banner page feature on or off for all jobs sent through the TCP/IP interface, follow these steps:

1 From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 3 and Enter.

A pair of numbered choices is displayed: one to turn the feature on, the other to turn it off.

2 Type the number of your choice and press Enter.

.

Viewing or changing the printer’s IP address

You must initially set the the printer’s IP address using one of the methods described in Chapter 4. Subsequently, you can use the TCP/IP Printer

Configuration Utility to change the address or to store it permanently in the printer’s nonvolatile memory.

1 From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 4 and Enter.

A pair of numbered choices is displayed. The first choice—“Use Network

Protocol”—indicates that you want no IP address stored in the printer; the second choice indicates that you want to store an address in the printer’s nonvolatile memory.

2 To change the address, press 2 and then Enter.

3 Type the IP address in the following format, then press Enter:

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each XXX is a number between 0 and 255.

To indicate that you don’t want the printer to have an IP address, type

0.0.0.0

and press Enter. (This is identical to choosing “Use Network

Protocol” in step 1.)

WARNING If your TCP/IP network contains devices with duplicate IP addresses, you may experience unpredictable network behavior, or your network may cease to function. Make sure you obtain a valid and unique IP address for the printer.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 285

286 Appendix A

Setting the subnet mask

If your network includes subnets, you can set the subnet mask.

WARNING Use this option with care. If you enter an invalid subnet mask, you may not be able to access the printer.

1 From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 5 and Enter.

2 When requested to do so, type the IP address of the subnet mask in the following format, then press Enter:

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each XXX is a number between 0 and 255.

To indicate that you don’t want to specify a subnet mask, type 0.0.0.0

and press Enter.

Setting the default gateway address

If your local network is attached to other networks, you can specify the

IP address of your local gateway. Whenever the printer needs to send messages to another network, it will use this gateway.

1 From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 6 and Enter.

2 When requested to do so, type the IP address of the gateway in the following format, then press Enter:

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each XXX is a number between 0 and 255.

Note: If you enter an invalid address for the gateway or if the gateway goes down, the printer may not be able to communicate with remote networks.

Enabling or disabling connection timeout checking

The timeout feature automatically severs TCP/IP connections that are idle for more than 5 minutes. Under most circumstances, you should leave this function enabled.

1 From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 7 and Enter.

2 Follow the instructions on your screen.

Changing the password for this utility

1 From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 8 and Enter.

2 When requested to do so, type a 5–10 character password.

The characters you type will not appear on the screen.

Resetting the printer’s TCP/IP interface

If you’re having problems with your TCP/IP connection to the printer and can’t solve the problem by any other means, you may try resetting the printer’s

TCP/IP interface.

m

From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 9 and Enter.

IMPORTANT If you reset the printer while a document is printing, it may not finish printing.

Restoring settings to their factory defaults

To restore the settings to their factory defaults: m

From the main menu of the TCP/IP Printer Configuration Utility menu, press 10 and Enter.

WARNING This option erases the utility’s password and the printer’s IP address. You must reset the address as described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer” in Chapter 4.

IMPORTANT If you choose this option while a document is printing, it may not finish printing.

Setting the Printer Default Settings 287

Appendix B Setting Up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer

Setting up your LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer as a remote ATPS

(AppleTalk Print Spooler) printer on a NetWare network requires minimal configuration; most of the network printing capability is built into every Mac OS–based computer. With the proper software and physical connections, a Mac OS–based computer on a NetWare network can print to a NetWare-managed printing queue that can be selected from the

Mac OS Chooser.

IMPORTANT ATPS is a part of Novell’s NetWare for Macintosh NetWare

Loadable Module (NLM) which must be loaded and configured on your

NetWare server. The configurations described in this appendix can be performed only after the Mac OS NLM has been installed.

289

Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 4 server

If you are setting up the printer for access by Mac OS–based computers on a

NetWare 4 network and this is the first time you are configuring ATPS, follow these instructions.

You can configure ATPS from the server console, or by running RCONSOLE

(remote console) from a client computer.

1 At the console prompt, type load install

The Install utility starts and a list of Installation Options appears.

2 Choose the Maintenance/Selective Install option and press Enter.

An additional list of product options appears.

3 Select Product Options from the list and press Enter.

A list of product options appears. If the NLM is installed and operating, a

NW-MAC option will be available.

4 Select the NW-MAC option and press Enter.

A list of configuration files appears.

5 Select Configure Printer Services and press Enter.

A list of print service configuration options appears.

6 Select Quick Configuration and press Enter.

A list of lookup parameter options appears.

7 Select the Printer Model entry and press Enter.

A list of printer types appears.

8 Select the LaserWriter 12/640 PS option and press Enter.

9 In the lookup parameter list, change the zone name to the zone in which the printer is currently located.

10 Select the Perform Lookup option and press Enter.

290 Appendix B

11 In the list of installed printers, locate and select the newly installed printer from the list.

(It should be identified as “LaserWriter 12/640 PS.”)

12 If necessary, edit the Spooler’s AppleTalk Name field and press Esc to complete the setup.

Note: You can also edit information about the print server or spooler. See the documentation provided with NetWare for more information.

13 Press Esc to exit the utility.

A prompt appears, asking if you want to create a new file.

14 Select Edit SYS:\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.BAT from the list of options and press Enter.

A window appears, displaying the field’s contents.

15 Insert the following line after the load afp statement.

load atps

This command instructs the NetWare server to load the ATPS service automatically at startup time.

16 Press Esc until the Install utility quits.

17 At the service console prompt, type load atps and press Enter.

The service is loaded and immediately becomes available to network users. A message appears confirming the load, and the console returns to the command line prompt.

Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 3.x server

If you are setting up the printer for access by Mac OS–based computers on a

NetWare 3.x network and this is the first time you are configuring ATPS, follow these instructions.

You can configure ATPS from the server console, or by running RCONSOLE

(remote console) from a client computer.

1 At the console prompt, type load install

The Install utility starts and a list of Installation Options appears.

Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer 291

292 Appendix B

2 Select Product Options from the list and press Enter.

A list of product options appears. If the Mac OS NLM is installed and operating properly, a NW-MAC option will be available.

3 Select the NW-MAC option and press Enter.

A list of configuration files appears.

4 From the list, select the file SYS:\SYSTEM\ATPS.CFG and press Enter.

A prompt appears, asking if you want to create a new file.

5 Type y and press Enter.

An empty window appears, providing an area in which to enter configuration information.

6 Enter a line of configuration information for each LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. (Enclose the printer name and zone in quotation marks.)

Example

"Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone"

This example identifies the printer “Sales Printer” located in the zone

“Ethernet Zone.”

You can include a -h option at the end of the line to instruct ATPS to make the printer unavailable for direct Mac OS printing; that is, the printer will be accessible only through ATPS queues.

Example

"Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone" -h

Note: Other ATPS options are available for configuring the printer. See

Novell’s NetWare for Macintosh documentation for more information on these options.

7 Press Esc to quit editing.

A prompt appears, asking if you want to save your changes.

8 Type y and press Enter.

The list of configuration files reappears.

9 Select the SYS:\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.NCF file and press Enter.

A window appears, displaying the file’s contents.

10 Insert the following line after the load afp statement: load atps

This command instructs the NetWare server to automatically load the ATPS service at startup time.

11 Press Esc to exit the editor, then type y and press Enter to confirm the changes.

12 Press Esc three times to exit the Install utility.

13 At the system console prompt, type load atps and press Enter.

The service is loaded and immediately becomes available to network users. A message appears confirming the load, and the console displays its prompt.

Modifying an existing ATPS configuration on a NetWare 3.x server

The procedure for modifying an existing ATPS configuration is similar to the procedure for creating a new configuration. The primary difference is that you are modifying an existing AUTOEXEC.NCF file instead of creating a new one.

1 At the console prompt, type load install

The Install utility starts and a list of Installation Options appears.

2 Select Product Options from the list and press Enter.

A list of product options appears. If the NLM is installed and operating properly, a NW-MAC option will be available.

3 Select the NW-MAC option and press Enter.

A list of configuration files appears.

4 From the list, select the file SYS:\SYSTEM\ATPS.CFG and press Enter.

A prompt appears, asking if you want to create a new file.

Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer 293

294 Appendix B

5 Type y and press Enter.

An empty window appears, providing an area for entering configuration information.

6 Enter a line of configuration information for each LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer. (Enclose the printer name and zone name in quotation marks.)

Example

"Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone"

This example identifies the printer “Sales Printer” located in the zone

“Ethernet Zone.”

You can include a -h option at the end of the line to instruct ATPS to make the printer unavailable for direct Mac OS printing; this makes the printer accessible only through ATPS queues.

Example

"Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone" -h

Note: Other ATPS options are available for configuring the printer. See the

NetWare for Macintosh documentation for more information on these options.

7 Press Esc to quit editing.

A prompt appears, asking if you want to save your changes.

8 Type y and press Enter.

The list of configuration files reappears.

9 Press Esc until the Install utility exits.

10 At the system console prompt, type unload atps and press Enter.

This command unloads the previous version of ATPS configuration. Now you can reload ATPS using the modified configuration.

11 At the system console prompt, type load atps and press Enter.

The new configuration is immediately available.

Appendix C

Using Fonts With the Printer

A font is a collection of letters, numbers, and symbols in a distinctive typographic design. Your Mac OS–based computer and LaserWriter 12/640

PS printer come with a variety of fonts that look great both on your monitor and on paper.

Fonts come in such a variety of formats that problems can sometimes arise.

This appendix provides the information you need to avoid such problems and to solve them if they come up.

Kinds of fonts

The Mac OS–based computer works with three main kinds of fonts: bitmapped, PostScript, and TrueType fonts.

Apple provides two kinds of fonts with your Mac OS–based computer and the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer, bitmapped and TrueType. However, your system can use PostScript fonts as well when it has the proper software installed.

295

296 Appendix C

Bitmapped fonts

Bitmapped fonts consist of “pictures” of a typeface at specific sizes. For example, you might have bitmapped fonts at 10-, 12-, and 18-point sizes installed in your Mac OS–based computer. For best results you need a separate font file for each size of character you want to use.

The icon of a bitmapped font (also called a fixed-size font or screen font) has the single letter A on it. The font’s point size appears at the end of its name.

When you request a bitmapped character, your computer looks for an installed bitmapped font in the size you specified. (See “How the Mac OS

Looks for Fonts,” later in this appendix.) If it can’t find that font, your computer tries to construct one by scaling a size that it does find.

In most cases, scaled bitmapped fonts don’t look nearly as good as preinstalled ones. Such scaling is one reason for the jagged edges (sometimes called “jaggies”) you’ll see on your screen or in a printed document when you request an uninstalled size (for example, 17-point Geneva).

Bitmapped fonts are designed on grids of 72 dots per inch (dpi)—the standard Mac OS screen resolution. Because of their correspondence to the standard screen resolution, bitmapped fonts in preinstalled sizes always look great on your display.

When you print a bitmapped font, it prints at a resolution of 72 dpi. Because most modern printers can print at resolutions far better than this (your

LaserWriter 12/640 PS prints at 600 dpi), printed bitmapped fonts almost always have jagged edges or stairstep sides.

Fortunately, the Mac OS can use bitmapped fonts in combination with other font formats, reserving bitmaps for the screen and other kinds of fonts for the printer.

PostScript fonts

PostScript is a page-description language that defines the characters, symbols, and images that appear on each page of a document. A PostScript font comes as a pair of fonts: an outline font for the printer and a corresponding bitmapped font for displaying type on your screen.

No bitmapped font, no menu entry: If your system doesn’t have the bitmapped font, the PostScript font name won’t appear in your font menu.

The LaserWriter 12/640 PS is designed specifically to work with PostScript fonts. Even printers that are not PostScript printers can use PostScript fonts if you have Adobe Type Manager software installed. Adobe Type Manager uses printer fonts to generate clean-looking screen text at any size. (Adobe Type

Manager is included with your LaserWriter 12/640 PS software.)

IMPORTANT Adobe Type Manager is not an Apple product. It is made and supported by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Only the version that comes with

Mac OS system software version 7.5 is supported by Apple.

PostScript printer fonts have no numbers associated with their names, because a single font can be scaled to any size. Many companies make

PostScript fonts; the following illustration shows icons for Adobe, Bitstream, and Fontek PostScript fonts, plus a generic PostScript font icon.

Using Fonts With the Printer 297

298 Appendix C

TrueType fonts

A TrueType font is scalable, describing a typeface without rigidly specifying a size. So it looks good whatever size you choose. TrueType fonts provide sharp text at any size on screen or on paper. You can mix and match TrueType fonts from various font vendors.

TrueType fonts store individual text characters as mathematical descriptions of lines and curves, rather than as groups of pixels (a bitmap). When a program asks for a character in a particular size, such as 33 points, the

Mac OS uses mathematical calculations to enlarge the character’s outline to 33 points and fill in the dots for the monitor or printer output.

Sometimes you’ll still get jagged edges when you print a document, even when you use a TrueType font. In nearly all cases, this is because there isn’t enough memory available to scale the font properly for printing.

Because you don’t need a separate font for each character size in order for your printing to look good (as you do with bitmapped fonts), TrueType font names don’t have numbers in them.

How does a font look? To see a TrueType or bitmapped font on your screen, double-click the font’s icon to open it. A sample of that font appears (in three sizes for TrueType fonts and in the size you opened for bitmapped fonts).

You can also use the Key Caps desk accessory to examine fonts. See the documentation that came with your computer for instructions.

QuickDraw GX imaging technology

A QuickDraw GX font is a TrueType or PostScript font with an additional set of sophisticated features. These features include extremely accurate typographic elements such as ligatures and kerning, plus the ability to skew, rotate, and add perspective to text in extremely flexible ways.

QuickDraw GX is more than a font format; it’s a sophisticated printing and display technology that supports complex graphics and advanced typography.

Using Fonts With the Printer 299

How TrueType fonts work with other kinds of fonts

Although TrueType fonts offer distinct advantages, your LaserWriter 12/640

PS printer can also use other kinds of fonts.

TrueType and bitmapped fonts

Mac OS–based computers running System 7 come with both bitmapped

(screen) fonts and TrueType fonts installed. This maintains consistency with documents created on Mac OS–based computers that don’t have

TrueType fonts.

If both a TrueType and bitmapped version of the same font are available, the

Mac OS uses the bitmapped font (providing that the stipulated point size is present). If you want the Mac OS to use the TrueType font, you need to remove the bitmapped font from your system.

300 Appendix C

For example, if a document uses 12-point Times, available in that size as a bitmapped font and as a TrueType font, the system uses the bitmapped font. If a document uses 4-point Times, the system scales the TrueType font to that size, because a bitmapped version isn’t available.

Using only TrueType fonts produces a closer match between the appearance of type on the screen and on paper. However, a document you’ve already created with bitmapped fonts will be reformatted with the corresponding

TrueType fonts, and line breaks in the document may change. Similarly, if a document is created on a system that has TrueType fonts or Adobe Type

Manager software installed, it may have different spacing, kerning, and so on, when opened on a system that doesn’t have TrueType fonts or Adobe Type

Manager software.

Keeping two font versions available

If you have a TrueType version of a font, you don’t need a bitmapped version.

However, although keeping both versions of a font takes up more disk space, there are several advantages to doing so.

Bitmapped fonts are hand-designed: a graphic artist planned each character in each font to look good on a screen. TrueType fonts are scaled by the computer to match what you request. At smaller point sizes, the bitmaps may appear sharper.

Additionally, scaling fonts takes time—sometimes up to several seconds in slower Mac OS–based computers—but all Mac OS–based computers can display a bitmapped font instantly.

Using Fonts With the Printer 301

TrueType and PostScript fonts

PostScript fonts were designed as fonts for PostScript printers. However, if you have Adobe Type Manager software installed, your computer can both display and print PostScript fonts.

Use different names: To avoid confusing the printer software, be sure that you don’t install both TrueType and PostScript versions of the same font. For example, do not have a PostScript font file called Times and a TrueType font file called Times installed in your system at the same time.

How the Mac OS looks for fonts

Here’s the search order the Mac OS uses to determine which font to display on your screen when you choose a specific size:

1. an installed bitmapped font in that size, if one exists

2. a scaled TrueType font, if no bitmapped font exists

3. an Adobe Type Manager (ATM) version of a PostScript font, if ATM is installed and if no TrueType version exists

4. a scaled bitmap if no ATM font exists

Here’s the search order it uses to determine which font to print on your

LaserWriter 12/640 PS (or any PostScript printer):

1. the printer’s ROM

2. the printer’s RAM

3. the System Folder where it looks first for a PostScript version of the font, then TrueType, and finally a bitmap version.

302 Appendix C

Where fonts are stored

All fonts for your LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer reside in special places within the System Folder. To install fonts in System 7, you drag them to the

System Folder. The Mac OS will automatically put them where they belong.

For versions 7.1 and 7.5 of the Mac OS, all the fonts are installed in the Fonts folder within the System Folder.

The Fonts folder can contain a total of 128 font suitcases (described in the next section), plus any number of PostScript fonts, up to the available storage capacity of your hard disk.

IMPORTANT Fonts installed in other folders or in the top level of the System

Folder may not work correctly. Additionally, bitmapped and TrueType fonts stored outside of suitcases may not work correctly.

Using Fonts With the Printer 303

304 Appendix C

Suitcases

A font suitcase is a special folder for collections of fonts.

Suitcases provide a convenient way to organize fonts in the same font family.

For example, it’s a good idea to use a single suitcase (called Courier) for all fonts in the Courier font family—all Courier roman fonts as well as fonts with names like Courier Bold and Courier Oblique.

Note: PostScript fonts won’t go into suitcases; you can, however, organize

TrueType fonts in suitcases.

Combining suitcases: To merge all the fonts from one suitcase with another, drag one suitcase on top of the other. All the fonts from the dragged suitcase will go into the other, and the dragged suitcase will disappear.

Note: To avoid confusion, rename a font suitcase whenever you put more fonts into it. For example, if you decide to merge Helvetica, Helvetica Black, and Helvetica Compressed, name the suitcase something like “Helvetica

Regular/Black/Condensed.”

A suitcase can also contain fonts from different font families, although you should keep all fonts of the same family in the same suitcase. All the fonts will still appear in menus with their proper names.

You treat a suitcase as you would a folder. To open a suitcase, you doubleclick it. To add a font, you drag the font’s icon to the suitcase and drop it in.

To remove a font, you drag its icon out of the suitcase.

To create a font suitcase, duplicate an existing one and throw away its contents. Then rename the suitcase as appropriate and drag whatever fonts you want into it.

You cannot have more than 128 font suitcases in the Fonts folder.

Size limits for suitcases: No matter how many fonts you have in a single suitcase, the Fonts folder counts the suitcase as a single unit. There’s no limit to the number of fonts in a single suitcase, but the suitcase cannot be larger than 16 megabytes.

IMPORTANT PostScript fonts cannot be placed in suitcases; they appear as individual files, loose inside the Fonts folder. Other than the limit imposed by your system’s memory (RAM), there’s no limit on the number of PostScript fonts you can have.

Using Fonts With the Printer 305

Styled fonts

Most fonts that come with your LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer have defined styles. For example, if you open the Bookman font (contained in a suitcase in the Fonts folder, which is inside your System Folder), you see files for bold and italic versions of the font.

306 Appendix C

But fonts such as Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, and New York do not come with defined styles. If you open the Chicago font suitcase, you see only one file.

You can apply a style to a font like this by making a choice from the appropriate menu (Fonts, Style, Format, or some similar menu, depending on the application program). A font predesigned with a given style nearly always looks better than a font with a computer-generated “derived” style.

About style names: Predesigned styled fonts sometimes have names you may not be familiar with. For example, roman refers to a font without styling, or plain. Oblique is similar to italic. Light, demi, and extra are different levels of bold.

Common questions about fonts

Here are some questions that often come up about fonts.

What kind of fonts should I buy?

Bitmapped fonts are best for screen display but don’t look as good when you print them. PostScript fonts look great on paper if you have a PostScript printer or Adobe Type Manager.

TrueType fonts are the best all-purpose fonts to use for your monitor and non-PostScript printers.

Why don’t all of my fonts appear in the Fonts menu?

You may not have all of your fonts placed correctly. In system software versions 7.1 and 7.5, all the fonts should be installed in the Fonts folder in the

System Folder.

Additionally, some application programs let the user decide which fonts should appear in the Fonts menu. Check the manuals that came with your programs.

Why can’t I see my Monaco 9, Geneva 9 and 12, and Chicago 12 bitmapped fonts?

These fonts are used by your computer to display information. Because the

Mac OS needs these fonts, the Finder makes them invisible to prevent users from removing them.

Using Fonts With the Printer 307

308 Appendix C

What does the term Apple classic fonts mean?

The Apple classic fonts are the original ten bitmapped fonts that came with the first Macintosh in 1984. These fonts, which all have city names, include

Athens, Cairo (a picture font), Chicago, Geneva, London, Los Angeles,

Monaco, New York, San Francisco, and Venice. Several of the fonts (Athens,

Cairo, London, and San Francisco) came in only one size—18 points.

Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, and New York are currently available in TrueType versions. The other classic fonts are still only available in bitmapped versions.

Why do I sometimes get Geneva or Courier in my printed documents when I have specified other fonts?

Geneva sometimes appears when you’re trying to use a TrueType font but don’t have enough memory for scaling to operate properly.

Substitute fonts can also appear in a document composed on one Mac OS computer that has a particular set of fonts but printed on another Mac OS computer that doesn’t have those fonts.

Why does a document written entirely in Times look different on different Mac OS computers?

Times, an extremely popular font, is manufactured and sold by more than one company. Such fonts usually have small differences, even though they have the same name. For example, the Times font manufactured by Adobe Systems

Incorporated has different letterspacing than does the Times font from

Apple Computer.

What is font substitution?

Font Substitution is an option in the Page Setup dialog box for certain

PostScript printers. When font substitution is turned on, these printers will use their built-in equivalents for three bitmapped fonts (Times for New York,

Helvetica for Geneva, and Courier for Monaco).

What’s a downloadable font?

A downloadable font is a TrueType or PostScript font sent to some kinds of printers, such as most PostScript Laser printers, by your system software. The printer then uses the font to print your document.

If a printer has sufficient memory, it can hold more than one downloaded font; otherwise, it must request the fonts it needs as necessary. This can be a time-consuming process.

Some printers have hard disks attached to them for holding downloaded fonts.

A printer can get the fonts from its hard disk more quickly than it can download them from the computer’s hard disk.

Your LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer can receive downloaded fonts.

Using Fonts With the Printer 309

Appendix D

Technical Information

Specifications

Marking engine m Fuji Xerox P893 laser-xerographic

Laser m Type: Semiconductor laser GaAlAs m Wavelength: 780 nm m Output power: 5 mW

Controller m AMD Am29040 30-MHz RISC microprocessor m 4 MB of ROM (including 35 Type 1 fonts) m 4 MB of RAM (expandable to 64 MB) m 80C186 I/O processor m 2 KB parameter EEPROM m LocalTalk port m Parallel port

311

312 Appendix D m AAUI Ethernet port with three protocols:

EtherTalk

Novell NetWare IPX (PSERVER or RPRINTER)

TCP/IP (BSD lpd ) m External Ethernet transceivers available for:

Thin Coax (10BASE-2)

Twisted Pair (10BASE-T)

Thick Coax (10BASE-5) m Two-position communication switch m All ports/protocols simultaneously active m 600 dpi resolution m 600 dpi FinePrint (edge enhancement for text and line art) m Enhanced 600 dpi grayscale imaging:

Standard

85 lines/inch dithered halftone, 101 gray levels

106 lines/inch dithered halftone, 129 gray levels

141 lines/inch dithered halftone, 73 gray levels

PhotoGrade (with 12 MB of RAM)

85 lines/inch halftone, 201 gray levels

106 lines/inch halftone, 257 gray levels

141 lines/inch halftone, 145 gray levels m PostScript Level 2 (2015) m PCL5 (LaserJet IIID emulation) m Automatic emulation switching

Printer fonts

Sixty-four fonts are provided with the LaserWriter 12/640 PS, including such fonts as ITC Avant Garde ® , ITC Bookman ® , Chicago, Courier, Delphian,

Garamond Condensed, Geneva, Helvetica ® , Helvetica Black, Helvetica

Compressed, Helvetica Narrow, Lubalin Graph, Lucida Bright, Machine,

Monaco, Nadianne, New Century Schoolbook, New York, Old English Text,

Onyx, Oxford, Palatino ® , Swing, Symbol, Times ® , ITC Zapf Chancery ® , ITC

Zapf Dingbats ® , and Zeal.

The following fonts are resident in the printer ROM: m AvantGarde Book, AvantGarde BookOblique, AvantGarde Demi,

AvantGarde DemiOblique m Bookman Demi, Bookman DemiItalic, Bookman Light, Bookman

LightItalic m Courier, Courier Bold, Courier BoldOblique, Courier Oblique m Helvetica, Helvetica Bold, Helvetica Bold Oblique, Helvetica Narrow,

Helvetica Narrow Bold, Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique, Helvetica Narrow

Oblique, Helvetica Oblique m NewCentury Schoolbook Bold, NewCentury Schoolbook BoldItalic,

NewCentury Schoolbook Italic, NewCentury Schoolbook Roman m Palatino Bold, Palatino BoldItalic, Palatino Italic, Palatino Roman m Symbol m Times Bold, Times Bold Italic, Times Italic, Times Roman m Zapf Chancery MediumItalic m Zapf Dingbats

The following PCL fonts are resident in the printer ROM: m Times Roman, Time Bold, Time Italic, Times Bold Italic m Univers Medium, Univers Medium Bold, Univers Medium Italic, Univers

Medium Bold Italic m Courier 12 pitch, 10 point Medium; Courier 12 pitch, 10 point Bold;

Courier 12 pitch, 10 point Italic; Courier 10 pitch, 12 point Medium;

Courier 10 pitch, 12 point Bold; Courier 10 pitch, 12 point Italic m Line Printer Font 16.67 pitch, 8.5 point, Medium

Technical Information 313

314 Appendix D

Speed m Simplex—12 pages per minute maximum using A4-size paper. Actual speed depends on the images printed.

m Duplex—8 pages per minute maximum using U.S. letter-size paper. Actual speed depends on the images printed.

Printer reliability (MTBF) m Average number of prints between failure is 180,000 pages.

Toner cartridge life expectancy m Life expectancy is 6,000 pages when printing text documents with average page coverage (5% black). An example of a 5% black page coverage is a page consisting of double-spaced 14-point courier type. Printing images and other graphics may impact toner cartridge life expectancy.

Printing materials

16- to 28-pound laser-quality bond (60 to 90 g/m 2 ); up to 50-pound (190 g/m 2 ) stock when fed manually through the multipurpose tray and exited through the face-up output tray. Accepts most textured and colored stock. Accepts medium-weight photocopier transparencies and labels. Envelopes can be printed from the multipurpose tray or from the optional envelope feeder.

The paper used should not scorch, melt, transfer material, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (393° F) for 0.1 seconds.

Paper sizes and capacity

Supports U.S. letter, A4, B5, executive, and legal in the standard paper cassette. The paper cassette holds 250 sheets of 20-pound (75 g/m 2 ) paper.

The multipurpose tray can hold up to 80 sheets of standard U.S. letter paper, and other paper sizes from postcard up to U.S. legal. An optional 500-sheet cassette is available that supports letter, A4, and U.S. legal-paper sizes. An envelope feeder that can automatically feed up to 50 envelopes is also available.

Paper Type

U.S. Letter

U.S. Letter Small

U.S. Legal

U.S. Legal Small

A4

A4 Small

A5

Executive

B5

Envelope sizes and weights

Envelope

Comm10

Monarch

EuroPostcard

DL

C5

Weight

24 lb

24 lb

50 lb

80 g/m 2

90 g/m 2

Dimensions

Printer only m Height m Width m Depth

9.5 in. (24.2 cm)

15.9 in. (40.5 cm)

16.7 in. (42.4 cm)

Printer with optional duplex printing unit m Height m Width m Depth

11.89 in. (30.2 cm)

15.9 in. (40.5 cm)

20.47 in. (52.0 cm)

Size

8-1/2" x 11" (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm)

8-1/2" x 11" (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm)

8-1/2" x 14" (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)

8-1/2" x 14" (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)

8.27" x 11.69" (210 mm x 297 mm)

8.27" x 11.69" (210 mm x 297 mm)

5.84" x 8.26" (148 mm x 210 mm)

7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (184.2 mm x 266.7 mm)

7.17" x 10.12" (182 mm x 257 mm)

Size

4 1/8" x 9 1/2" (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)

3 7/8" x 7 1/2" (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)

4.13" x 5.83" (105 mm x 148 mm)

110 mm x 220 mm

162 mm x 229 mm

Technical Information 315

316 Appendix D

Printer with optional 500-sheet cassette and feeder m Height m Width m Depth

14.0 in. (35.6 cm)

15.9 in. (40.5 cm)

16.7 in. (42.4 cm)

Printer with optional duplex printing unit and 500-sheet cassette feeder m Height m Width m Depth

16.2 in. (41.1cm)

15.9 in. (40.5 cm)

20.4 in. (52.0 cm)

Space requirements

About 7 in.

or 18 cm

Exhaust vent Note: Vertical clearance is about 14 in. or 36 cm

About 6 in.

or 15 cm

About 1 in. or 2.5 cm

About 17 in.

or 43 cm

Weight m Approximately 30 lb. (14 kg)

Environmental information

Operating m Temperature m Humidity

50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C)

15 to 80 percent RH non-condensing m Maximum altitude 8,200 feet

Storage (toner cartridge) m Temperature m Humidity

Storage (printer) m Temperature m Humidity

32° to 95° F (0° to 35° C)

15 to 85 percent RH non-condensing

32° to 122° F (0° to 40° C)

35 to 85 percent RH non-condensing

Voltage requirements

U.S.

m 103.5 to 126.5 VAC, 58 to 62 Hz or Europe/Australia m 198 to 264 VAC, 48 to 52 Hz

IMPORTANT The LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer does not contain a universal power supply.

Power consumption

Energy-saving mode m 26 W

Standby average m 100/120 V, approximately 125 W m 220/240 V, approximately 120 W

Operating average m 110/120 V, approximately 390 W m 220/240 V, approximately 370 W

Maximum power consumption m 110/120 V, approximately 790 W, 6.8 A m 220/240 V, approximately 770 W, 3.5 A

Technical Information 317

About PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files

Installing the Mac OS printer software also installs PPD files to support the following Apple LaserWriter printers: m LaserWriter m LaserWriter Plus m Personal LaserWriter NT m Personal LaserWriter NTR m Personal LaserWriter 320 m LaserWriter II NT m LaserWriter II NTX m LaserWriter II NTXJ m LaserWriter IIf m LaserWriter IIg m LaserWriter Select 360 m LaserWriter Select 360f m LaserWriter Select 610 m LaserWriter Pro 400 m LaserWriter Pro 405 m LaserWriter Pro 600 m LaserWriter Pro 630 m LaserWriter Pro 810 m LaserWriter Pro 810f m LaserWriter 4/600 PS m LaserWriter 16/600 PS m LaserWriter 16/600 PSf m LaserWriter Color 12/600 PS m LaserWriter 12/640 PS

318 Appendix D

You can optionally install the Windows PPD files for these Apple LaserWriter printers: m LaserWriter Select 360 m LaserWriter Pro 600 m LaserWriter Pro 630 m LaserWriter Color 12/600 PS m LaserWriter 16/600 PS m LaserWriter 12/640 PS

RAM upgrade specifications

To increase the printer’s RAM, purchase SIMMs with the following specifications:

SIMM dimensions m Length: 107.95 mm +/- 0.20 mm (4.25 in. +/- .008) m Height: 25.53 mm (1.005 in.) maximum

SIMM sizes and speeds

Size

4 MB SIMM

8 MB SIMM

16 MB SIMM*

32 MB SIMM*

Configuration

1 M X 32 bit (one 4 MB bank)

2 M X 32 bit (two 4 MB banks)

4 M X 32 bit (one 16 MB bank)

8 M X 32 bit (two 16 MB banks)

Speed

70 ns or less

70 ns or less

70 ns or less

70 ns or less

Connector type

72-pin

72-pin

72-pin

72-pin

* Must have a 2 KB row (11 bit x 11 bit) refresh configuration. 16 MB SIMMs with a 4 KB row (10 bit X 12 bit) refresh configuration are not compatible with the printer.

Technical Information 319

Ozone emission

Ozone gas is emitted by almost all laser printers and photocopiers. The

LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer technology allows it to emit practically no ozone gas (less than .01 parts of ozone per million parts of air). The current

OSHA permissible exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 parts of ozone per million parts of air (ppm). The ozone emissions from the LaserWriter 12/640 PS printer comply with Underwriters Laboratory (UL) safety limits.

Depending on the levels of concentration, ozone can be a mild-to-severe irritant with known effects ranging from dry throat and nose, headache, and sore eyes to nausea, vomiting, and pulmonary congestion. For this reason various regulatory agencies have established limits regarding the amount of ozone to which employees may be exposed. The employer is responsible for providing a work environment that meets these standards.

You can usually identify ozone by its characteristic odor, even in concentrations well below the permissible exposure limit. However, as the concentration of ozone or the duration of exposure increases, your ability to smell it may decrease.

To minimize ozone exposure, install the LaserWriter 12/640 PS in a wellventilated area and keep the equipment properly maintained. If there are other laser printers or photocopying machines in the same area, additional air circulation may be required. Do not place the LaserWriter 12/640 PS in a small, enclosed space that lacks adequate ventilation. Position the printer so that the fan exhaust does not blow directly into an individual’s face. Finally, maintain the relative humidity between 30 and 70 percent. Extremely low humidity can slow the natural breakdown of ozone in the air.

320 Appendix D

Communication settings

The following table shows the default communication settings. For information about using the communication switch to adjust communication settings, see “Adjusting Communication Settings” in Chapter 1. To change or view the current communication settings, use the Apple Printer Utility on

Mac OS–based computers or the Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows on

IBM PC or compatible computers (see Appendix A).

Normal (in) switch position

These settings can be changed to the following modes:

Port

LocalTalk

Ethernet

Parallel

Network Protocol

LocalTalk

EtherTalk

Netware

TCP/IP

TBCP

Normal

Raw

Mode

PostScript

PostScript, Off

PostScript, PCL5, AutoSelect, Off

PostScript, PCL5, AutoSelect, Off

PostScript, PCL5, AutoSelect, Off

PostScript, Off

PostScript, PCL5, AutoSelect, Off

Default

PostScript

PostScript

AutoSelect

PostScript

AutoSelect

PostScript

AutoSelect

Reset (out) switch position

When the communication switch is in the Reset (out) position, the following values are used:

Port

LocalTalk

Ethernet

Parallel

Network Protocol

LocalTalk

EtherTalk

NetWare

TCP/IP

Parallel

Mode

PostScript

PostScript

AutoSelect

PostScript

AutoSelect (raw protocol)

Note: When the communication switch is in the Reset (out) position, a startup page is printed each time the printer is turned on and the Extended

Job Status settings are removed.

Technical Information 321

Accessories

In the U.S.A., to locate your local Apple-authorized reseller, call

1-800-538-9696.

In the U.S.A., you can order LaserWriter 12/640 PS supplies direct from

Apple by calling 1-800-600-7805.

Item

Apple Ethernet Thin Coax Transceiver

Apple Ethernet Twisted Pair Transceiver

Apple Ethernet AUI Adapter

LaserWriter 12/640 PS Toner Cartridge

LaserWriter 12/640 PS 500-Sheet Cassette and Feeder

LaserWriter 12/640 PS Envelope Cassette

LaserWriter 12/640 PS Face-Up Output Tray

LaserWriter 12/640 PS Duplex Printing Unit

Part Number

M0329Z/B

M0437Z/B

M0432LL/A

M4683G/A

M4682G/A

M4680G/A

M4698G/A

M4697G/A

322 Appendix D

Index

A

accessories 322

Add Port dialog box (Windows 95) 191 addresses assigning IP addresses 78, 79–82,

265–266, 278 printing Ethernet 278 setting default gateway 286 viewing or changing IP 285

Adobe Type Manager installing Type 1 fonts 75 support for 297

Advanced PostScript Options dialog box

(Windows 95) 185–186

All pages from option (Print dialog box) 133

Apple classic fonts 308

Apple Ethernet AUI adapter 20, 322

Apple Ethernet thin coaxial transceiver

20, 322

Apple Ethernet twisted-pair transceiver

20, 322

Apple LaserWriter CD-ROM disc installing on Mac OS computer from

31–32 preparing a Mac OS server using

40–41 unpacking 5

Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 25, 28, 270–282 connecting manually to a network printer 282 functions of 270–271 naming AppleTalk printers 272 opening and quitting 271 printing the configuration page 280 a list or samples of printer fonts 275 the page count 281 the printer’s Ethernet address 278 restarting the printer 281 selecting FinePrint or PhotoGrade options 279–280 sending PostScript files to the printer 278 setting print density 280 tray switching and paper size options 273–274 specifying a font symbol set 281

IP address for the printer 278 turning the startup page on or off 272 viewing or changing communication settings 275–277

Apple Printer Software Read Me file 39

323

324 Index

Apple Printer Utility 152, 250–270 assigning IP addresses for Mac OS with 79, 82, 265–266 choosing not to install 35 defining tray switching and paper size options 201, 258–260 downloading fonts to the printer 255 functions of 250 job handling for network protocols

263–264 for the Mac OS 25, 28 naming the printer 254 opening 251–252 printing a configuration page 270 printing font samples 256 quitting 253 removing fonts 256 restarting the printer 269–270 selecting FinePrint or PhotoGrade options 261–262 sending PostScript files to printer 269 setting network zones and names 38,

264–266 print density 258 turning startup page on or off 257 viewing and changing communication settings 266–269 printer information 253

AppleTalk Print Spooler. See ATPS

AppleTalk protocol 20–21

ASCII format saving print files as 140 selecting (Windows 95) 185 setting printer to receive

(Windows 3.1) 163

ATPS (AppleTalk Print Spooler) configuring for first time on NetWare 3.x server 291–293 on NetWare 4 server 290–291 installing Mac OS NLM and 289 modifying existing configuration

(NetWare 3.x server) 293–294 setting up a printer as 63 automatic language sensing 96 automatic tray switching setting options in Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 273–274 in Apple Printer Utility 201,

258–260 for Windows 95 182, 183 for Windows 3.1 163

Auto Select printing feature 201

A/UX workstations 84–86 avoiding paper jams 198, 232

B

background printing 140–141

Background Printing dialog box 141 banner pages troubleshooting for UNIX workstations 246 turning on or off 284 bidirectional printer support 191 binary format printing to files as (Mac OS) 140 selecting (Windows 95) 185 sending PostScript files in

(Windows 3.1) 159, 170 setting printer mode for

(Windows 3.1) 163 binding orientation, selecting for duplex printing 139,179 bitmap compression 185 bitmapped font icon 296 bitmapped fonts about 296 alignment options for 131 using TrueType fonts with 300–301 blank documents 234

BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) assigning IP addresses through 79–80 troubleshooting servers with 247–248

C

cables

Apple Ethernet thin coaxial transceiver 20, 322

Apple Ethernet twisted-pair transceiver 20, 322 for LocalTalk kit 6, 17 obtaining network 6 safety precautions for 4 canceling printing on Mac OS computers 148 timeouts and

Windows 95 184, 190

Windows 3.1 159 capacities of cassettes and multipurpose tray 2, 12, 314

CAPTURE command capturing

(Novell NetWare) 172 a port (Windows 95) 190 the queue (DOS-based printing) 172

CD-ROM disc. See Apple LaserWriter

CD-ROM disc children, safety precautions for 4

Chooser not on Apple menu 237 printer appears more than once in 239 not listed in 238–239 selecting network zones for printers 36 printer using 146 choosing a printer IP name 80–81 cleaning the printer exterior 224 safety precautions for 4 solvents for 2, 224 closing the top cover 11 color options for matching

(Windows 3.1) 158, 159 specifying for watermarks in Windows 95 188 in Windows 3.1 166

Color Matching dialog box 134, 136 communication settings changing for UNIX workstations 96 and viewing with Apple

LaserWriter Utility for Windows

275–277 and viewing with Apple Printer

Utility 266–269 communication switch position and 321 customizing 27–28 communication switch communication settings and 321 location of 16, 27 restoring communication settings for Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 277 for Apple Printer Utility 268–269 settings for Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 276 for Apple Printer Utility 263 configuring the printer in Mac OS 36–37 making changes to printer setup 38 for newly installed options for Mac OS computers 124–126 for Windows computers 127 for PSERVER mode 63–64, 68 setting defaults with Mac OS computers 250–270 for Windows computers 25, 28,

270–282 for UNIX workstations 95 configuring workstations 82–95 for HP-UX version 8.07 86–89 for HP-UX version 9.x 89–91

IBM AIX version 3.x 93–94 for SCO UNIX 91–93

Index 325

326 Index

Silicon Graphics IRIX 95 for Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix, A/UX, or other BSD systems 84–86 for Sun Solaris 83 connecting the power 24–26 the printer to Ethernet network 20–22 to LocalTalk network 17–18 for Mac OS computers 16, 19–20 manually with Apple LaserWriter

Utility for Windows 282 for UNIX workstations 16 to Windows or DOS with parallel interface cable 22–23 controller specifications 311–312

Control Panel opening the printer Setup dialog box from 155 setting printing options (Windows 95)

175–176 copies specifying for Windows 95 178 specifying number per document page

(Windows 3.1) 157

Cover Page dialog box 135 cover pages, printing automatically

134–135 covers closing 11 opening the top 6 removing the side 118–119 top and bottom 102–103 replacing the side 123–124 creating installation floppy disks for Mac OS computers 32–31 for Windows 95 computers 52–53 for Windows 3.1 computers 53 a printer in PSERVER mode 66–67 a printer server in PSERVER mode 65 a print queue in PSERVER mode 67

Ctrl-D protocol option for Windows 95 computers 185–186 for Windows 3.1 computers 159 curling problems 141, 196, 233

Custom Installation option (Windows)

48, 50, 57

Custom Install option (Mac OS) 31, 35

D

default desktop icon 145, 147 default gateway address, setting 286 default printer 37 icon for 147 methods for changing 145–146

De-Install option 57 desktop printer deleting 37 printing (Mac OS computers) 144 removing software from Mac OS computers 151 desktop printer icons deleting 37 dragging documents to 144, 145 selecting printers using 146 solving problems with 241–242 working with 147

Desktop PrintMonitor manual feed notification for 242 turning off for Mac OS computers 150

Detail tab dialog box 190–191

Device Options tab dialog box 181–182 disabled desktop icon 147 disk space requirements for fonts and software 30 for installation on Windows 95 computers 45 on Windows 3.1 computers 46 distorted print images 235–236 documents blank 234 dragging to desktop printer icon

144, 145

grayscale 135–136, 233, 234 printing with Mac OS computers 132–134 to PostScript or EPS file 139–140,

157, 169–172 with UNIX workstations 97 from Windows 95 computers 175 problems printing 39, 233–236

DOS-based printing capturing the queue for 172 setting up for 46 troubleshooting tips for 243–244 from Windows applications 154–166

DOS PostScript driver 46 downloading fonts about 309 with Apple Printer Utility 255

Unlimited Downloadable Fonts option 131 for Windows 3.1 computers 164,

166–168 dragging documents to desktop printer icon

144, 145 drivers. See printer drivers duplex printing on letterhead paper 199 multipurpose tray and 199 selecting with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 162, 179, 274 with Apple Printer Utility 260 duplex printing key 102 duplex printing unit checking for paper jams 231–232 face-up output tray installation for

114–115 installing 11, 100–107 memory requirements for 100 output and 141 paper guide installation for 103–104 part number for 322 problems with 235

RAM requirements for PhotoGrade option with 100, 118, 137, 138

E

Easy Install option (Mac OS) 31 energy-saving feature power consumption for 317 using 26 warm-up time and 241, 244, 247 envelope cassette capacity of 314 filling 211–212 inserting in 500-sheet feeder 212 installing 11, 112 part number for 322 envelopes avoiding jams with 212 compatible sizes of 211 directing to face-up tray 196 loading in multipurpose tray

201–202, 205–206 printing 206–207 technical specifications for 315 unacceptable types of 205

EPS (encapsulated PostScript) files printing

Mac OS 139–140

Windows 3.1 157, 169–172 saving 169 selecting format (Windows 3.1) 157 error desktop icon 147 errors handling PostScript 164 reporting 142–143

/etc/printcap file, adding entries to 85, 92

Ethernet configurations for connecting to

20–22 printing address for printer 278 transceivers and cables for 6 verifying frame types for 68

Ethernet hub 21

Ethernet port 16

Express Installation option (Windows)

48, 50, 57

Index 327

328 Index

F

face-down output tray 260 face-up output reducing curl and wrinkles with 141, 196 selecting with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 274 with Apple Printer Utility 260 face-up output tray advantages of 260 on duplex printing unit 114–115 installing 11, 113–114 part number for 322 removing 116

FAX ports 191

Features tab dialog box 162–163

File menu (Windows 3.1) 156 files. See also ASCII format; binary format; PostScript files formatting options for PostScript 140

Mac OS 139–140

Windows 95 183, 184

Windows 3.1 157, 163, 170 printing

PDF documentation xv test files 39, 74 support for PPD 318

FinePrint option for Mac OS computers 136–138 turning on or off with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 279–280 with Apple Printer Utility 261–262 for Windows 95 181, 183 for Windows 3.1 163

First page from option

(Print dialog box) 133

500-sheet cassette and feeder. See also automatic tray switching capacity of 314 checking for paper jams 230 installing 108–111 loading 214–215 part number for 322 as preferred paper source 126 removing 101, 111 software indicator for 162 fixing roller assembly 218

Flip Horizontal option

(PostScript dialog box) 131

Flip Vertical option

(PostScript dialog box) 131 floppy disks creating from CD-ROM disc for Mac OS 32–31 for Windows 95 52–53 for Windows 3.1 53 for installing printer software on Mac OS 33–35 on Windows 95 53–56 on Windows 3.1 56–58 preparing a Mac OS server using

40–41

Font Downloader 167

Font inclusion option (PostScript Printer

Options dialog box) 140 fonts 295–309. See also font substitution; PostScript fonts;

TrueType fonts bitmapped 296 buying 307 common questions about 307–309 disk space increasing RAM and 116 requirements for 30 downloading with Apple Printer Utility 255 for Windows 3.1 computers 164,

166–168 how Mac OS looks for 302

PostScript 1, 297, 302 printing samples with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 275 with Apple Printer Utility 256

QuickDraw GX imaging technology 299 removing with Apple Printer Utility 256 from printer RAM 116–124 selecting for watermarks in Windows 95 187 in Windows 3.1 165 specifications for 313 specifying symbol sets 281 storing 303 styled 306 suitcases for 304–305

TrueType about 298–299 support for 1 using with bitmapped fonts

300–301 using with PostScript fonts 302 types of for Mac OS computer 295 for Windows 3.1 160–161

Unlimited Downloadable Fonts option 131

Fonts category (Apple Printer

Utility) 255

Fonts menu, displaying fonts on 307

Fonts Substitution Table

(Windows 95) 188

Fonts tab dialog box for Windows 95 188–189 for Windows 3.1 160–161 font substitution common questions about 308, 309 with Mac OS 131 with Windows 95 188–189 with Windows 3.1 160–161 foreground printing for watermarks functions

(Windows 3.1) 166 of Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 270–271 of Apple Printer Utility 250 of Installer 32

G

garbled printing 244, 245 gateway address 286

General tab dialog box

(Windows 95) 189

Get Printer Info 150 graphics increasing RAM and 116 selecting options on Windows 95

180–181 troubleshooting printing for 245 grayscale documents printing with Mac OS computers

135–136 problems with 233, 234 grounding power plugs 3 wrist straps 117, 120

H

halftones 180

Hold Job button 148

HP-UX version 8.07 workstations 86–89

HP-UX version 9.x workstations 89–91 humidity operating ranges for 316–315 protecting printer from water and 3–4

I

IBM AIX version 3.x workstations configuring 93–94 running the SMIT utility 93

ICMP Echo Request Packet 80 icons for bitmapped font 296 for default printer 145 determining printer status with 147 dragging documents to desktop printer

144, 145

Installer 34

Index 329

330 Index

LaserWriter Disk 1 41

LaserWriter 12/640 PS 37 for PostScript fonts 297

Imaging Options category (Apple Printer

Utility) 262

Imaging Options dialog box

(Mac OS) 137 increasing printer RAM 116–124 installation floppy disks creating for Mac OS 32–31 for Windows 95 computers 52–53 for Windows 3.1 computers 53

Installer icon 34

Installer program choosing Custom Install 35 function of 32 installing the duplex printing unit 100–107 envelope cassette 112 the face-up output tray 113–116 the first toner cartridge 8–11

500-sheet cassette and feeder

108–111

LaserWriter 12/640 PS options 11 paper guide, for duplex printing unit

103–104

PPD file support 318–319 printer RAM 117 printer software from a CD-ROM disc 31–32,

47–49, 50–51 creating installation floppy disks

32–31, 52–53 from floppy disks 33–35, 53–58 from a Mac OS server 42 onto a Mac OS server 40–41

SIMMs 121–123

Type 1 fonts 75 for UNIX workstations 78 onto a Windows 95 server 52 onto a Windows 3.1 server 52 on Windows NT 3.5–based server or non-Intel computer 61–62 on Windows NT 3.5x workstations

59–60 on Windows NT 4.0–based computers 60

Invert Image option (PostScript dialog box) 131

IP addresses 79–83 assigning 78, 79–82 with Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 278 with Apple Printer Utility 265–266 viewing or changing for printer

(TCP/IP Printer

Configuration Utility) 285

J, K

Job Control tab dialog box

(Windows 3.1) 163–164 job handling, for network protocols

263–264 job timeouts in Windows 95 184, 190 in Windows 3.1 159 key commands for PCONSOLE 64

L

labels 208

Landscape view for Windows 95 177 for Windows 3.1 157 laser specifications 311

LaserWriter Disk 1 icon 41

LaserWriter 8 icon, not in Chooser 238

LaserWriter Setup dialog box changing paper sources 126 changing software for printer options 125

LaserWriter 12/640 PS 1–28

adjusting communication settings

27–28 choosing a location for 2, 101, 108 connecting 16–23 to Ethernet network 20–22 to LocalTalk network 17–18 to Novell NetWare 4.1 networks

62–74 the power and turning on the printer 24–26 to single Mac OS–based computer

19–20 to Windows or DOS with parallel interface cable 22–23 deleting a desktop printer 37 features of 1–2 front, rear, and sides of 100 height, width, and depth of 315 installing the first toner cartridge 8–11 printer options for 99–127 loading paper cassettes 12–15 maintenance 217–224 naming 36 print resolution of 1, 180, 312 removing the covers 102–103 safety instructions for 3–4 speed of 1, 314 technical specifications for 311–317 unpacking 5–7

LaserWriter 12/640 PS icon 37

LaserWriter Utility for Windows assigning IP addresses using 79, 82 defining paper size in multipurpose tray 201

Layout dialog box 139 layout options for Windows 95 177 for Windows 3.1 157 letterhead paper duplex printing on 199 loading 14 in the 500-sheet cassette 213 in multipurpose tray 201, 202, 204 loading the printer 195–215 compatible paper sizes and 196 envelope cassette 211–212 envelopes (multipurpose tray)

205–206

500-sheet cassette 214–215 labels 208 letterhead 201, 202, 204 three-hole punched paper 203 transparencies 208 paper cassette 12–15 for legal and other size paper 198 for letterhead and three-hole punched paper 14, 199 for letter-sized paper 197–198 paper quality and print quality 210 postcards 212–213

LocalTalk network connecting 17–18 connecting kit for 6, 17

LocalTalk port 16, 19 locating the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 2 with duplex printing unit added 101 with 500-sheet cassette and feeder installed 108 logging in, to TCP/IP Printer

Configuration Utility 283 lpd daemon, verifying operations of 84

M

Mac OS computers 29–43, 129–152 configuring the printer 39, 250–270 making changes to 151–152 new options 125–126 setting options for printing 134 connecting the printer for 16 determining printer status from its icon 147 installing printer software 31–35 from the CD-ROM disc 31–32 creating installation floppy disks for 32–31

Index 331

332 Index from the installation floppy disks 33–35 from a server 42 onto a server 40–41 kinds of fonts for 295

Mac OS NLM installation 289

PPD file support and 318 printers choosing for 35–38 naming and setting zones for 38 setting up as ATPS remote

289–294 switching between 145–146 testing 39 printing background 140–141 on both sides of paper 138–139 controlling functions for 129 cover pages automatically

134–135 with desktop printer 144 documents with 132–134 envelopes 207 with FinePrint or PhotoGrade options 136–138 grayscale documents 135–136 monitoring 148–150 to a PostScript or EPS file

139–140 reporting errors in 142–143 problems with margins on 233 removing desktop printing software 151 searching for fonts on 302 selecting the output tray 141–142 page setup options 130–132 system requirements for 30 troubleshooting for 237–242 using Apple Printer Utility program 152 maintenance 217–224 cleaning the exterior 224 precautions during 219 replacing the toner cartridge 219–224 safety tips for 218 manual, onscreen xv manual feed alerts changing 150 turning message on or off 242

Manual Feed paper source 133 manual-feed printing 202 margins designating unprintable areas

(Windows 95) 178 options for 159 problems with 233 marking engine specifications 311 memory. See also printer RAM; SIMMs checking printer (Windows 3.1) 162 flashing status lights and 226 increasing printer RAM 116–124

“out of memory” message 239 removing fonts from printer

RAM 256 requirements for duplex printing 100 for Mac OS computers 30 specifying available printer

(Windows 95) 182 when to install 11 mirror images (Windows 95) 181 monitoring printing 148–150, 242 moving print requests to another printer 149 multiplatform support. See also Mac OS computers; UNIX workstations;

Windows 95 computers;

Windows 3.1 computers communications settings for network protocols 321 connecting the printer and 16 network protocols supported 312 multiple paper sources 133

multipurpose tray 199–209. See also automatic tray switching capacities of 2, 12, 202, 314 loading 201–202 envelopes in 205–206 labels in 208 letterhead in 201, 202, 204 three-hole punched paper in 203 transparencies in 208 opening 200 removing during paper jams 229 uses for 199

N

naming the LaserWriter 12/640 PS

36, 38 with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 272 with Apple Printer Utility 254 choosing a printer IP name 80–81 negative images, specifying

(Windows 95) 181

NetWare Directory Services (NDS), incompatibility with 62

NetWare for Macintosh, installing

Mac OS NLM 289 network client software 45 network protocols job handling for 263–264 ports for 16 networks connecting printers to Ethernet 20–22 to LocalTalk 17–18 manually with Apple LaserWriter

Utility for Windows 282 obtaining cables for 6 setting up LaserWriter 12/640 PS for Novell NetWare 62–74 sharing printers on 192–193 network zones choosing for printers 36 setting with Apple Printer

Utility 38, 264–266

Novell NetWare 4.1 62–74 assigning passwords for print servers 72–73

CAPTURE command 172 choosing an operating mode 63–64 connecting Ethernet with 20–21

PCONSOLE key commands 64 processor requirements for 46 setting up PostScript printer driver for Windows 95 73–74 for Windows 3.1 74 setting up the printer as print server

(using PCONSOLE) 65–69 as remote printer

(RPRINTER mode) 69–72 troubleshooting for 244–245

O

opening

Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 271 the Apple Printer Utility 251–252 multipurpose tray 200 the top cover 6 operating and storing temperatures 316–315

“out of memory” message 239 output trays. See also face-up output tray face-up and face-down 260 installing face-up 11, 113–114 selecting for Mac OS computers

141–142 selecting for Windows 95 179 software indicator for in

Windows 3.1 162 ozone emission 320

Index 333

334 Index

P

page count 281

Page Setup dialog box (Mac OS)

130–132 page setup options for Mac OS 130–132 for Windows 95 174 for Windows 3.1 154

“Pages per Sheet” pop-up menu (Layout dialog box) 139 paper loading in multipurpose tray 201–202 loading letterhead and three-hole punched 14 quality of 210 recommended weight of 195, 210 reducing curling when you print 141,

196, 233 technical specifications for 314 types and sizes of 12

US Letter Small or US Legal Small options for 130 paper cassettes. See also automatic tray switching capacities 2, 12, 314 compatible paper sizes for 196 installing 11 loading 12–15 legal and other size paper 198 letterhead 14, 199, 201, 202,

204, 213 letter-sized paper 197–198 three-hole punched paper 14, 199,

203, 213 removing during paper jams 228 paper guide, for duplex printing unit

103–104

Paper Handling category (Apple Printer

Utility) 258–260 paper-handling options setting for Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 273–274 setting in Apple Printer Utility

258–260

Paper Jam light 26, 226 paper jams 225–232 avoiding 198, 232 checking for and clearing 227–229 duplex printing unit 231–232

500-sheet cassette and feeder 230 status lights 226 when printing labels 208 with envelopes 212 with transparencies 209 paper orientation selecting options for Mac OS 130 for Windows 95 177 for Windows 3.1 157

Paper Out light 26 operating status and 226 printing envelopes and 207 paper size compatible 196 selecting options for Mac OS 130 for Windows 95 177 for Windows 3.1 157 technical specifications for 314, 315 paper source changing 126 multiple 133 selecting 157 with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 273–274 with Apple Printer Utility 258–260 for Windows 95 178 switching 142

Paper tab dialog box options for Windows 95 177–179 options for Windows 3.1 157 parallel interface cables 6 connecting to Windows or DOS with

22–23 parallel port connecting printer to 23 location of 16 printing from 46

passwords assigning for print server 72–73 for TCP/IP Printer Configuration

Utility 247, 287

PCONSOLE utility

(Novell NetWare) 62 assigning passwords in 72–73 setting up the printer as print server using 65–69 using 64

PhotoGrade option for Mac OS computers 136–138 problems with grayscale documents 233

RAM requirements for 100, 118,

137, 138 selecting with Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 279–280 with Apple Printer Utility 261–262 turning on and off in Windows 95 181, 182 in Windows 3.1 162 ping command setting IP addresses and 79, 80–81 testing connections with 86, 88, 90 troubleshooting with 248 placing printing requests on hold 149 plain desktop icon 147

Port Configuration category (Apple

Printer Utility) 267–268

Portrait view for Windows 95 177 for Windows 3.1 computers 157 ports capturing 190 choosing settings for with Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 276–277 with Apple Printer Utility 268

FAX 191 mapping LPT1 to a queue 172 parallel 23 printer 19 and protocols for networks 16 specifying for printers on Windows 95 190–191 on Windows 3.1 computers 51 positioning watermarks in Windows 95 188 in Windows 3.1 166 postcard guide 211, 212 postcards directing to face-up tray 196 loading 212–213

PostScript specifying language level for

(Windows 95) 185 troubleshooting for UNIX workstations 246

PostScript error handlers

(Windows 3.1) 164

PostScript files formatting options for Mac OS 139–140 for Windows 95 183–186 for Windows 3.1 159, 169–172 printing as text (Mac OS) 145 reporting printing errors on 142–143 selecting options for 131, 158–159 sending to printer with Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 278 with Apple Printer Utility 269

PostScript font icons 297

PostScript fonts 1 about 297 organizing 304, 305 substituting for TrueType fonts for Windows 95 188–189 for Windows 3.1 160–161

PostScript headers in Windows 95 184 in Windows 3.1 164

PostScript Options dialog box

(Mac OS) 131

PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files

318–319

Index 335

336 Index

PostScript printer driver for DOS 46 for Windows 95 73–74 for Windows 3.1 74

PostScript Printer Options dialog box 140

PostScript tab dialog box for Windows 95 183–186 for Windows 3.1 158–159 power consumption 317 power cord grounding the plug 3 plugging in the printer 24 unpacking 5 power switch

On and Off positions 24 turning on the printer 25 previewing screen, option for 157 print density adjusting 234 setting with Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 280 with Apple Printer Utility 258

Print Density category (Apple Printer

Utility) 258

Print dialog box, options don’t appear in 240 printer configuration page for Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 280 for Apple Printer Utility 270 for TCP/IP Printer Configuration

Utility 284

Printer Driver Only option (Welcome dialog box) 48, 50, 57 printer drivers displaying alerts with incompatible

(Windows 95) 186

PostScript

DOS 46

Windows 95 and 3.1 73–74 setting options for DOS and

Windows 3.1 155–157

Printer folder opening Properties dialog box from

(Windows 95) 183, 184, 188,

189, 190–191, 192 setting printing properties with

(Windows 95) 175, 176 printer font specifications 313

Printer Information category (Apple

Printer Utility) 252, 253 printer options 99–127 configuring printer software for 124–127 for Windows 95 127 increasing printer RAM 116–124 installing the duplex printing unit 100–107 envelope cassette 11, 112 the face-up output tray 113–116

500-sheet cassette and feeder

108–111 selecting for Windows 3.1 156–166

Printer Options dialog box 142 printer port 19 printer RAM 116–124 advantages of increased 116 configurations for installing 117 installing SIMMs 121–123 putting on the grounding strap

117, 120 removing fonts from 256 removing the side cover 118–119 replacing the side cover 123–124 upgrade specifications for 319 printer reliability specifications 314 printers choosing for Mac OS computers

35–37 configuring for Mac OS computers 39 determining status from its icon 147 getting information about 150 not listed in Chooser 238–239 resetting the TCP/IP interface for 287 selecting (Mac OS computers)

130, 146

setting up as print server using

PCONSOLE 65–69 storage temperature and humidity 317 switching between 145–146

Printers control panel Setup dialog box 51

Printer Selector window

(Apple Printer Utility) 251 printer setup options changing 38, 39, 150 for Mac OS computers 151–152 for printing PostScript files 170–171 printer software changing for new options on Mac OS computers 125–126 configuring for printer options

124–127 installing from a CD-ROM disc 31–32,

47–49, 50–51 creating installation floppy disks

32–31, 52–53 from floppy disks 33–35, 53–58 from a Mac OS server 42 onto a Mac OS server 40–41 for UNIX workstations 78 onto a Windows 95 server 52 onto a Windows 3.1 server 52 on Windows NT 3.5–based server or non-Intel computer 61–62 on Windows NT 3.5x workstations

59–60 on Windows NT 4.0–based computers 60 printer speed 1, 314

Printer’s Zone category (Apple Print

Utility) 265 printer vents 2, 4 printer zones 38, 264–266 printing. See also duplex printing background 140–141 canceling 148 changing order of items in queue 149 controlling functions for Mac OS computers 129 cover pages 134–135 with desktop printer on Mac OS computers 144 documents to ASCII or binary files 140 grayscale 135–136 with Mac OS computers 132–134 problems with 233–236 with UNIX workstations 97 from Windows 95 computers 175 envelopes from multipurpose tray

206–207 foreground 166 garbled 244, 245 handling options for 149 laser-quality paper and 12 monitoring 148–150 no paper comes out of printer while

240, 243–244 number of pages per toner cartridge 8 from parallel port 46 to PostScript or EPS file

Mac OS 139–140

Windows 3.1 169–172 selecting binding orientation for

139, 179 stopping 149 a test file from Windows 95 74 troubleshooting problems for IBM PC-based computers

243–244 with Mac OS computers 237–242 for Novell NetWare computers

244–245 for UNIX workstations 246–248 watermarks 166, 187 printing desktop icon 147 printing errors

(Mac OS computers) 142–143

Print Manager icon 156

Index 337

338 Index

Print on Both Sides option

(Layout dialog box) 139 print resolution 1, 180, 312 print servers configuring NetWare 290–294 creating for RPRINTER mode 69–70 preparing Mac OS as 40–41 setting up printers as 65–69 starting in PSERVER mode 72 troubleshooting with RARP 247 print times, setting (Mac OS computers)

140–141 processor requirements for installation on Windows 95 computers 45 on Windows 3.1 computers 46

Properties dialog box (Windows 95) 176 protocols connecting Ethernet to AppleTalk,

Novell NetWare, and

TCP/IP 20–21 options for 159 and ports available for computers 16 setting for ports (Apple Printer Utility)

267–268

PSERVER mode (Novell NetWare) completing the configuration in 68 creating a printer in 66–67 a printer server in 65 a print queue in 67 restarting the printer 69 setting up a printer in 63–64 starting on a NetWare 4.1 file server 72

Q

queue capturing the 172 changing order of items in 149 creating a print 70–71 placing documents in with UNIX workstations 97 sorting documents in 149 queue scan time 68

QuickDraw GX imaging technology 299 quitting

Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 271 the Apple Printer Utility 253 the TCP/IP Printer Configuration

Utility 284

R

RAM. See printer RAM

RAM expansion kits 116

RARP (Remote Address

Resolution Protocol) assigning IP addresses through 79–80 troubleshooting servers with 247

Read Me file, test printing 39

Ready/In Use light 26, 226 remote printers 289–294 configuring ATPS for first time on NetWare 3.x server 291–293 on NetWare 4 server 290–291 modifying ATPS configuration on

NetWare 3.x server 293–294 setting up the printer as 69–72

Remove button 148 removing desktop printing software 151 face-up output tray 116

500-sheet cassette and feeder

101, 111 fonts 256 from printer RAM 116–124

multipurpose tray 229 packing material 7 paper cassettes 228 the printer covers 102–103 resetting the TCP/IP interface 287 restarting the printer with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 281 with Apple Printer Utility 269–270 configuring PSERVER mode and 69 configuring RPRINTER mode and 72 restoring factory defaults 287

Resume Job button 148 rlp daemon 88, 91

Rotated Landscape view for Windows 95 177 for Windows 3.1 157

RPRINTER mode (Novell NetWare) completing the configuration for

71–72 creating a printer for 70 a print queue 70–71 a print server for 69–70 restarting the printer and 72 setting up printer in 63, 64 setting up remote printer 69–72

S

safety tips disconnecting the power plug 3–4 grounding power plugs 3 grounding wrist straps 117, 120 for maintenance and troubleshooting 218 precautions during maintenance 219

Save Settings button (Print dialog box) 133 saving energy power consumption and 317 using energy-saving feature 26 warm-up time and 241, 244, 247 scaling images for Windows 95 181 for Windows 3.1 157

SCO UNIX workstations 91–93 adding entries to /etc/printcap file 92 selecting a printer from the Printer icon 146 using its desktop printer icon 146 using the Chooser 146

Select Precision Bitmap Alignment option (PostScript dialog box) 131 separator pages (Windows 95) 189 servers assigning passwords for print 72–73 installing printer software from Mac OS 42 onto Mac OS 40–41 onto Windows 95 52 onto Windows NT 3.5–based server or non-Intel computer

61–62 onto Windows 3.1 52 preparing using floppy disks

(Mac OS) 40–41 setting up in PSERVER mode 65 troubleshooting with RARP 247 service interval 217

SET BINDERY CONTEXT command

(Novell NetWare) 62

Set Print Time button 148

Settings pop-up menu (Mac OS) 134

Setup dialog box (Mac OS) 38

Setup dialog box (Windows 3.1)

Features options for 162–163

Fonts options for 160–161

Job Control options for 163–164 modifying to print PostScript file

170–171 opening 155–156

Paper options for 157

PostScript options for 158–159

Watermark options for 164–166

Index 339

340 Index

Sharing tab dialog box (Windows 95)

192–193 side cover 123–124

Silicon Graphics IRIX workstations 95

SIMMs (Single Inline Memory

Modules). See also memory flashing status lights and 226 installing 121–123 upgrade specifications for 319

SMIT utility 93

Smooth Graphics option (PostScript dialog box) 131

Smooth Text option (PostScript dialog box) 131 soft fonts (Windows 95) 188 software space requirements 30 sorting documents in queue 149 speed specifications 1, 314

Spool Settings dialog box

(Windows 95) 191 spreadsheets, troubleshooting printing for 245 startup page 25 turning on or off with Apple LaserWriter Utility for Windows 272 with Apple Printer Utility 257

Startup Page category (Apple Printer

Utility) 257 status lights checking for paper jams 226 location and names of 26 printing envelopes and 207 stopped desktop icon 147 stopping printing 149 storing fonts 303 style names for fonts 306 subnet mask 286–287 substitute fonts. See font substitution

Substitute Fonts option (PostScript dialog box) 131 suitcases for fonts 304–305

Sun OS version 4.1 workstations adding entries to computer voice file 85 configuring 84–86

Sun Solaris workstations 83 switching between printers 145–146 switching cassettes. See tray switching

System Administration Manager (SAM) utility 86–87, 89–90

SYSTEM.INI file (Windows 3.1) 52 system requirements for Mac OS computers 30 for Windows 95 45 for Windows 3.1 46

T

tagged binary communications protocol

(Windows 95) 185

TCP/IP (Transmission Control

Protocol/Internet Protocol) assigning IP addresses to printer 78 changing configurations with Apple

Printer Utility 265–266 connecting Ethernet with 20–21

TCP/IP category (Apple Print

Utility) 266

TCP/IP Printer Configuration

Utility 283–287 displaying information about TCP/IP interface 284 logging in to telnet 283 printing the configuration page 284 quitting 284 setting the subnet mask 286–287 turning banner page on or off 284 viewing or changing the printer’s IP address 285 technical specifications 311–317 telnet 283 testing the printer with Mac OS computers 39 with Windows 95 computers 74 with Windows 3.1 computers 74

three-hole punched paper 14 in the 500-sheet cassette 213 in multipurpose tray 203 in paper cassette 199 timeouts enabling or disabling for TCP/IP connections 286 specifying for Windows 95 184, 190 toner problems with 233 smudges 235 toner cartridges installing the first 8–11 life expectancy of 314 number of impressions per 8 part numbers for 322 replacing 219–224 storage temperature and humidity for 317 unpacking 5 traffic control 1 transparencies avoiding jams with 209 choosing 210 directing to face-up tray 196 loading in multipurpose tray 208 printing 133 tray switching setting options in Apple LaserWriter Utility for

Windows 273–274 in Apple Printer Utility 201,

258–260 in Windows 95 182, 183 in Windows 3.1 163 troubleshooting for IBM PC-based computers

243–244 if document does not print 39 for Mac OS computers 237–242 for Novell NetWare computers

244–245 onscreen information about xv printing problems with documents

233–236 safety tips for 218 unable to print startup pages 25 for UNIX workstations 246–248

TrueType fonts 1 about 298–299 with bitmapped fonts 300–301 with PostScript fonts 302 substituting PostScript fonts for

Windows 95 188 in Windows 3.1 160–161 suitcases for 304–305 turning off Desktop PrintMonitor

(Mac OS) 150 turning on the printer 24–26

Type 1 fonts downloading for Windows 3.1 167 installing with Adobe Type

Manager 75

U

Ultrix workstations 84–86

UNIX workstations 77–97 changing communication settings for 96 configuring the printer for 95 configuring workstations 82–95 for HP-UX version 8.07 86–89 for HP-UX version 9.x 89–91

IBM AIX version 3.x 93–94 for SCO UNIX 91–93

Silicon Graphics IRIX 95 for Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix,

A/UX, or other BSD systems

84–86 for Sun Solaris 83 connecting the printer for 16 installing printer software 78 obtaining IP addresses for printer 78,

79–82

Index 341

342 Index printing and queuing documents with 97 troubleshooting printing for 246–248

Unlimited Downloadable Fonts option

(PostScript dialog box) 131 unpacking the LaserWriter 12/640 PS

5–7

Unprintable Area dialog box

(Windows 95) 178 urgent print requests 149 user documentation xv

US legal-size paper face-up output and 141 loading 198

US Legal Small paper option 130

US Letter Small paper option 130

V

ventilation 320 verifying Ethernet frame types 68 viewing printer information, with Apple

Printer Utility 253 virus-detection programs turning off during installation 31 turning on after installation 32 voltage requirements 317

W, X, Y, Z

wait timeouts in Windows 95 184, 190 in Windows 3.1 159 warm-up time 241, 244, 247 water and dampness protection 3–4 watermarks options for Windows 95 computers

186–188 options for Windows 3.1 computers

164–166 specifying which to use 157

Watermark tab dialog box for Windows 95 186–188 for Windows 3.1 164–166 weight of printer 5

Welcome dialog box 48, 50

Windows 95 computers 174–193 configuring

PostScript printer driver for 74 the printer 25, 28, 270–282 designating unprintable areas 178 installing PPD file support 319 installing printer software 47–58 from CD-ROM disc 47–49 creating floppy disks from

CD-ROM disc 52–53 from floppy disks 53–56 onto a server 52 options for sharing network printers

192–193 printer options for 127 printing documents 175 envelopes 207 options for 175–176 a test file 74 selecting fonts in 188–189 graphics options 180–181 page setup options 174 paper options for 177–179 system requirements for 45 troubleshooting tips for 243–244

Windows NT computers installing printer software on 3.5–based server or non-Intel computer 61–62 on 3.5x workstations 59–60 on 4.0–based computers 60 troubleshooting tips for 243–244

Windows 3.1 computers configuring the printer 25, 28,

270–282 downloading fonts 166–168

installing printer software from CD-ROM disc 50–51 creating floppy disks from

CD-ROM disc 53 from floppy disks 56–58 onto a server 52

PostScript files and 169–172

PostScript printer drivers for 74

PPD file support and 319 printer options for 127 printing envelopes 207 printing from Windows applications

154–166 fonts options for 160–161 job control options for 163–164 opening Setup dialog box 155–156 optional features for 162–163

PostScript options for 158–159 selecting page setup options 154 selecting printer options 156–166 setting printer driver options

155–157 watermark options for 164–166 system requirements for 46 test file printing for 74 troubleshooting tips for 243–244 workstations, configuring UNIX 77–97

Index 343

The Apple Publishing System

This Apple manual was written, edited, and produced on a desktop publishing system using

Apple Macintosh computers and QuarkXPress. Technical illustrations were drawn in Adobe ™

Illustrator; screen shots were created and modified with system software, ExposurePro, and

Adobe Photoshop. Final pages were output using PostScript ™ technology.

Text type is Times ® , display type is Helvetica ® Narrow, and cover type is Apple Garamond,

Apple’s corporate font. Ornaments are custom symbols designed for Apple Computer. Some elements, such as computer voice, are set in Courier, a fixed-width font.

PostScript, the LaserWriter page-description language, was developed by Adobe Systems

Incorporated.

LaserWriter 12/640 PS

LaserWriter 12/640 PS

LaserWriter 12/640 PS

LaserWriter 12/640 PS

LaserWriter 12/640 PS

Apple

LaserWriter 12/640PS

User’s Manual

K Apple Computer, Inc.

© 1997 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.

Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement.

The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws.

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors.

Apple Computer, Inc.

1 Infinite Loop

Cupertino, CA 95014-2084

408-996-1010 http://www.apple.com

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, A/UX, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, LocalTalk, Mac, Macintosh,

StyleWriter, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Finder, FinePrint, and QuickDraw are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Acrobat, Adobe, Adobe Type Manager, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems

Incorporated or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.

AIX is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation and is being used under license.

Helvetica, Palatino, and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries.

ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.

PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation, used under license therefrom.

UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S. and other countries, licensed exclusively through

X/Open Company, Ltd.

Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.

Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada.

Proprietary Rights Notice

The digitally encoded, machine-readable outline data for producing the typefaces provided as part of your printer is copyrighted © 1981 Linotype. All rights reserved. This data is the property of Linotype, and may not be reproduced, used, displayed, modified, disclosed, or transferred without the express written approval of Linotype.

Contents

Communications regulation information vii

Laser information viii

Preface Where to find information ix

1 Setting Up the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 1

Main features of the LaserWriter 12/640 PS 1

Choosing a place for the printer 2

Important safety instructions 3

Unpacking the printer 5

Installing the first toner cartridge 8

Wait to install the LaserWriter 12/640 PS options 11

Loading paper into the cassette 12

Connecting the printer 16

Connecting to a LocalTalk network 17

Connecting directly to a single Mac OS–based computer 19

Connecting to an Ethernet network 20

Connecting to a Windows or DOS computer with a parallel cable 22

Connecting the power and turning on the printer 24

Saving energy 26 iii

iv Contents

Adjusting communication settings 27

Why customize communication settings? 27

How to customize communication settings 28

What to do next 28

2 Setting Up the Printer for Mac OS Users 29

Before you begin 30

System requirements 30

Initial AppleTalk setup 30

Step 1: Installing the printer software 31

Step 2: Choosing the printer 35

Step 3: Naming the printer and setting its zone 38

Step 4: Making sure everything is working 39

Configuring the printer 39

Installing the software from a server 40

Installing onto a server 40

Installing the printer software from the server 42

What to do next 43

3 Setting Up the Printer for Windows, DOS, and NetWare Users 45

System requirements for Windows 95 45

System requirements for Windows 3.1 46

Before you begin 46

Setting up for DOS-based printing 46

Setting up for parallel port printing 47

Installing the printer software for Windows 95 and Windows 3.1 47

Installing from the CD-ROM disc 47

Installing onto a server 52

Creating floppy disks from the CD-ROM disc 52

Installing from the floppy disks 53

Installing the printer software for Windows NT 59

Installing onto a Windows NT 3.5x–based computer 59

Installing onto a Windows NT 4.0–based computer 60

Installing onto a Windows NT 3.5x–based server or non-Intel computer 61

Initial Novell NetWare 4.1 setup 62

Step 1: Choosing an operating mode 63

Step 2, option A: Setting up the printer as a print server

(using PCONSOLE) 65

Step 2, option B: Setting up the printer as a remote printer

(RPRINTER mode) 69

Step 3: Assigning a password for the print server (optional) 72

Step 4: Setting up the PostScript printer driver for NetWare 73

Step 5: Making sure everything is working 74

Installing Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager 75

What to do next 75

Contents v

vi Contents

4 Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 77

Before you begin 77

Initial TCP/IP setup 78

Background information 78

Step 1: Installing the printer software 78

Step 2: Obtaining an IP address for the printer 78

Step 3: Assigning an IP address to the printer 79

Step 4: Configuring users’ workstations 82

Configuring Sun Solaris 83

Configuring Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix, A/UX, or other

BSD systems 84

Configuring HP-UX version 8.07 86

Configuring HP-UX version 9.x 89

Configuring SCO UNIX 91

Configuring IBM AIX version 3.x 93

Configuring Silicon Graphics IRIX 95

Configuring the printer 95

Changing the communication settings 96

What to do next 97

Communications regulation information

FCC statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected.

Radio and television interference

The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices.

If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio.

(That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)

If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.

IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product.

This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance.

Communications Regulation Information vii

viii Laser Information

DOC statement

DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.

Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des

Communications.

Laser information

WARNING Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your equipment’s manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses, with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an Apple-authorized service provider.

Your printer is a Class 1 laser product. The Class 1 label, located in a user-accessible area, indicates that the printer meets minimum safety requirements. A service warning label is located in a service-accessible area. The labels on your product may differ slightly from the ones shown here.

Class 1 label Service warning label

Where to Find Information

First use the printed manual to set up your printer. The printed manual contains setup and installation information.

Next go to the onscreen manual to learn how to use your printer. The file is in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). To read or print the documentation, you use the Acrobat Reader software on the CD-ROM disc. The PDF file is located at MAC_OS:Monochrome LaserWriter:

LW12/640UM.pdf and WIN_OS\MONO_LSR\LW12/640U.pdf on the

CD-ROM disc.

The onscreen manual includes additional setup information (for example, how to name your printer) and continues (beginning with Chapter 5) with usage information, troubleshooting, and technical information about your printer.

IMPORTANT If you already have Acrobat Reader installed on your computer, you do not need to install it from the CD-ROM disc. If you do install Acrobat

Reader from the CD-ROM disc, an Adobe Acrobat folder may appear as the active folder on your screen, blocking access to the onscreen manual. Close the Acrobat folder (or drag it out of the way) so you can open the onscreen manual.

ix

Tips for using Acrobat Reader

Adobe Acrobat Reader has features that give you fast, easy access to information.

m For help using Acrobat Reader, choose Acrobat Reader Help from the Help

( h) menu at the top of your screen. The Adobe Acrobat Reader Online

Guide appears.

m Print only specific pages or sections of the onscreen manual that contain information you need. Printing an entire PDF file can be a timeconsuming task and can use large amounts of ink and paper unnecessarily.

x Preface

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement